1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Start New Environment
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and behind it the new list.
10543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Start New Parent Environment
10546 only appears if the item is nested.
10547 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12699 bad metrics, and other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 European Computer Modern
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12902 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12910 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12911 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12916 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12924 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12930 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12931 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12934 \begin_layout Itemize
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12962 community in order to replace
12966 as the default font.
12967 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12968 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 One difference is improved kerning.
12993 \begin_layout Itemize
12994 If you do not like the look of
13002 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13023 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13027 serif and typewriter fonts,
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13032 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13048 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13065 \begin_inset space \space{}
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13089 but you can also select your own.
13090 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 The differences between roman,
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13105 fonts are explained in section
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13112 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13117 \begin_inset Newline newline
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13128 was originally designed for newspapers.
13129 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13130 into the small newspaper columns.
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13139 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13156 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13161 depends on the class you are using.
13162 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 Note that the font size is the
13171 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13172 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13173 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13174 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13177 \begin_inset space ~
13183 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13190 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13206 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13211 serif or typewriter.
13216 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13226 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13234 LaTeX font encoding
13236 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13237 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13243 \begin_inset Index idx
13246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13260 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13265 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13266 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13276 Use Old Style Figures
13280 Use True Small Caps
13283 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13286 Use Old Style Figures
13288 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13290 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13298 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13302 Use True Small Caps
13304 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13305 of scaled capitals.
13306 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13307 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13315 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13316 a font to display the script characters.
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13327 \begin_inset Index idx
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13337 So this has no effect for the document language
13351 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13355 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13368 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13369 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13371 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13373 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13376 dialog, see section
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13383 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13395 \begin_layout Subsection
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13400 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13401 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13403 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13404 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13405 choose a math font in the dialog
13407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13411 \begin_inset Index idx
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13415 Document ! Settings
13421 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13422 automatically selects a math font.
13423 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13424 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13433 \begin_inset space ~
13439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13444 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13445 document font is available.
13448 \begin_layout Standard
13449 Note that the math font will not be used for
13453 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13459 or by the insertion of the command
13466 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13467 \begin_inset space ~
13471 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13472 while the math characters do not.
13474 \begin_inset space ~
13477 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13480 \begin_inset space ~
13488 \begin_inset space ~
13493 in the document font settings.
13496 \begin_layout Standard
13497 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13498 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13499 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13500 font (in most cases
13501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13516 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13517 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13525 \begin_inset space ~
13531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13537 \begin_layout Subsection
13538 Using Different Character Styles
13539 \begin_inset Index idx
13542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13549 \begin_inset Index idx
13552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13563 automatically changes the character style for certain
13564 paragraph environments.
13566 supports two character styles,
13575 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13579 \begin_layout Standard
13584 style, do one of the following:
13587 \begin_layout Itemize
13588 click on the toolbar button
13597 \begin_layout Itemize
13598 use the key binding
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13608 These commands are all toggles.
13613 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13616 \begin_layout Standard
13617 One typically uses the
13621 style for proper names.
13623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13630 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 A more widely used character style is the
13644 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13651 \begin_layout Itemize
13652 clicking on the toolbar button
13661 \begin_layout Itemize
13662 using the keybindings
13671 \begin_layout Standard
13676 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13678 use a different font.
13681 \begin_layout Standard
13682 We've been using the
13686 style all over the place in this document.
13687 Here's one more example:
13690 \begin_layout Quotation
13693 Do not overuse character styles!
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13697 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13698 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13699 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13700 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13718 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13724 arg "dialog-show character"
13730 \begin_layout Subsection
13731 Fine-Tuning with the
13736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13738 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13743 \begin_inset Index idx
13746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13758 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13759 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13760 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13761 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13762 from ordinary dialog.
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13767 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13768 \begin_inset Newline newline
13771 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13772 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13775 \begin_layout Standard
13776 To use custom character styles, open the
13778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13780 \begin_inset space ~
13783 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13786 dialog or press the toolbar button
13789 arg "dialog-show character"
13793 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13794 font property that you can choose.
13795 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13798 \begin_inset space ~
13803 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13808 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13809 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13810 environments all at once.
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13829 \begin_layout Labeling
13830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13844 The possible options are:
13848 \begin_layout Labeling
13849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13854 This is the Roman font family.
13855 Normally a serif font.
13856 It's also the default family.
13866 \begin_layout Labeling
13867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13871 \begin_inset space ~
13878 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13890 \begin_layout Labeling
13891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13898 This is the Typewriter font family.
13904 arg "font-typewriter"
13913 \begin_layout Labeling
13914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13919 This corresponds to the print weight.
13924 \begin_layout Labeling
13925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13930 This is the Medium font series.
13931 It's also the default series.
13934 \begin_layout Labeling
13935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13942 This is the Bold font series.
13955 \begin_layout Labeling
13956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13961 As the name implies.
13966 \begin_layout Labeling
13967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13972 This is the Upright font shape.
13973 It's also the default shape.
13976 \begin_layout Labeling
13977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13991 s the Italic font shape
13997 \begin_layout Labeling
13998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14005 This is the Slanted font shape
14007 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14008 , this is different from italic).
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14016 \begin_inset space ~
14023 This is the Small caps font shape
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 Alters the text color.
14037 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14041 \begin_inset space ~
14046 , which means that the document default color set in
14048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14055 \begin_inset space ~
14060 is used, you can choose between
14137 \begin_inset Index idx
14140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14149 \begin_layout Labeling
14150 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14155 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14156 the language of the document.
14157 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14158 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14160 \begin_inset Newline newline
14163 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14165 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14166 When using the spell checking (see section
14167 \begin_inset space ~
14171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14173 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14177 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14180 \begin_layout Labeling
14181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14186 Alters the size of the font.
14187 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14188 proportional to the document font size.
14189 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14190 the details, but a general description of what
14196 \begin_layout Labeling
14197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14218 arg "font-size tiny"
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14246 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size small"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14323 It's also the default size.
14327 arg "font-size normal"
14333 \begin_layout Labeling
14334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14355 arg "font-size large"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size larger"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size largest"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 arg "font-size huge"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size giant"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14479 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14499 arg "font-size increase"
14505 \begin_layout Labeling
14506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14511 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14531 arg "font-size decrease"
14538 \begin_layout Standard
14543 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14544 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14546 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14547 — use those instead.
14548 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14551 \begin_layout Labeling
14552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 This is text with emphasize on
14573 This might seem like the same as
14577 , but it is actually a bit different.
14583 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14585 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14588 \begin_layout Labeling
14589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This is text with Underbar on.
14602 arg "font-underline"
14608 \begin_inset Newline newline
14613 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14614 when you could not change fonts.
14615 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14616 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14617 because some people
14621 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14624 \begin_layout Labeling
14625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 \begin_inset space ~
14636 This is text with Double underbar on.
14642 arg "font-underunderline"
14646 \begin_inset Newline newline
14649 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14650 about double underbar.
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 \begin_inset space ~
14665 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14671 arg "font-underwave"
14675 \begin_inset Newline newline
14678 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14679 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14690 This is text with Strikeout on.
14696 arg "font-strikeout"
14700 \begin_inset Newline newline
14703 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14704 changed in the meantime.
14707 \begin_layout Labeling
14708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14715 This is text with Noun on.
14722 , this is a logical attribute.
14723 Normally it's equivalent to
14726 \begin_inset space ~
14735 \begin_layout Standard
14736 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14737 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14739 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14744 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14750 arg "dialog-show character"
14753 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14754 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14757 arg "textstyle-apply"
14761 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14766 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14773 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14774 (suppose you just set the shape to
14775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14793 \begin_inset space ~
14805 \begin_layout Standard
14806 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14814 \begin_inset space ~
14826 \begin_layout Itemize
14832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14839 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14857 \begin_inset Newline newline
14861 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14875 \begin_inset Note Note
14878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14879 For more on phantoms see section
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14886 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14896 \begin_inset Newline newline
14902 \begin_layout Itemize
14907 fonts use characters with serifs.
14908 These are the small
14909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14916 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14917 The following example shows the difference:
14918 \begin_inset Newline newline
14922 \begin_inset Newline newline
14927 text without serifs
14930 \begin_inset Newline newline
14933 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14934 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14941 \begin_layout Itemize
14946 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14947 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14948 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14951 \begin_layout Standard
14952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14959 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14960 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14963 \begin_inset space ~
14968 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14969 the property to be removed.
14970 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14971 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14972 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14991 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14999 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15003 \begin_inset space ~
15008 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15019 If you, for example, set
15020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15038 \begin_inset space ~
15043 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15052 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15055 \begin_layout Standard
15056 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15057 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15060 \begin_layout Section
15061 Printing and Previewing
15064 \begin_layout Subsection
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15070 using \SpecialChar LyX
15071 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15072 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15073 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15074 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15076 Additional Features
15081 \begin_layout Standard
15083 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15086 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15087 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15088 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15091 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15092 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15093 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15094 to turn your writing into printable output.
15095 This happens in two stages:
15098 \begin_layout Enumerate
15099 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15100 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15102 a file with the extension,
15103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 \begin_layout Enumerate
15118 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15119 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15120 to use the commands in the
15124 file to produce printable output.
15127 \begin_layout Subsection
15128 Output file formats
15129 \begin_inset Index idx
15132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15141 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15149 Simple text (ASCII)
15150 \begin_inset Index idx
15153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15154 File formats ! ASCII
15162 \begin_layout Standard
15163 This file type has the extension
15164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15176 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15180 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15187 \begin_layout Standard
15188 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15190 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15191 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15193 \begin_inset space ~
15199 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15200 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15201 bibliography (section
15202 \begin_inset space ~
15206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15208 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15213 If your document includes such material, use
15215 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15216 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15218 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15234 \begin_inset space ~
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15244 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15245 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15251 \begin_inset Index idx
15254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15255 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 \begin_layout Standard
15265 This file type has the extension
15266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15277 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15280 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15281 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15282 -Errors or to process it manually
15283 with console commands.
15284 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15285 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15286 's temporary directory whenever you
15287 view or export your document.
15290 \begin_layout Standard
15291 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15292 -file using the menu
15294 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15295 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15299 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15300 export variants are explained in section
15301 \begin_inset space ~
15305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15307 reference "subsec:Export"
15314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15316 \begin_inset Index idx
15319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15328 \begin_layout Standard
15329 This file type has the extension
15330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15350 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15351 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15352 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15356 \begin_layout Standard
15357 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15358 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15359 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15360 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15361 when you view the DVI.
15362 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15365 \begin_layout Standard
15366 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15368 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15369 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15374 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15375 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15377 \begin_inset space ~
15383 The latter option uses the program
15385 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15391 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15394 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15395 font access (see section
15396 \begin_inset space ~
15400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15402 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15407 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15408 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15415 \begin_inset Index idx
15418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15419 File formats ! PostScript
15427 \begin_layout Standard
15428 This file type has the extension
15429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15441 PostScript was developed by the company
15445 as a printer language.
15446 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15448 PostScript can be seen as a
15449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15452 programming language
15453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15456 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15461 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15468 \begin_inset Index idx
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15473 packages ! pstricks
15483 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15486 \begin_layout Standard
15487 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 Encapsulated PostScript
15492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 (EPS, file extension
15496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15508 As \SpecialChar LyX
15509 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15510 convert them in the background to EPS.
15511 If, for example, you have 50
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15515 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15517 \begin_inset space ~
15520 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15521 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15523 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15524 EPS to avoid this problem.
15527 \begin_layout Standard
15528 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15530 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15531 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15539 \begin_inset Index idx
15542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_inset Index idx
15552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15561 \begin_layout Standard
15562 This file type has the extension
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 Portable Document Format
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15587 was derived from PostScript.
15588 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15598 looks exactly the same.
15601 \begin_layout Standard
15602 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15606 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 (JPG, file extension
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15638 Portable Network Graphics
15639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15642 (PNG, file extension
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15656 converts them in the
15657 background to one of these formats.
15658 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15659 will slow down your workflow.
15660 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15663 \begin_layout Standard
15664 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15666 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15672 \begin_layout Description
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15677 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15681 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15684 \begin_layout Description
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15693 ) This uses the program
15695 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15698 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15701 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15704 is a new engine, derived from
15708 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15709 access (see section
15710 \begin_inset space ~
15714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15716 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15721 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15722 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15727 \begin_layout Description
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15736 ) This uses the program
15741 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15747 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15748 font access (see section
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15755 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15760 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15761 vertically written Japanese.
15764 \begin_layout Description
15766 \begin_inset space ~
15769 (cropped) This is the same as
15772 \begin_inset space ~
15777 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15778 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15779 to generate good-looking
15780 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15783 \begin_layout Description
15785 \begin_inset space ~
15788 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15792 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15796 \begin_layout Description
15798 \begin_inset space ~
15801 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15805 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15806 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15810 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15811 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15814 \begin_layout Standard
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15827 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15828 works without problems.
15829 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15830 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15834 \begin_inset space ~
15842 \begin_inset space ~
15847 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15857 \begin_inset Index idx
15860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15861 FileFormats ! XHTML
15867 \begin_inset Index idx
15870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15879 \begin_layout Standard
15880 This file type has the extension
15881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15893 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15894 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15895 When \SpecialChar LyX
15896 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15897 suitable for the purpose.
15898 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15904 between different formats, which are described in section
15906 Math Output in XHTML
15911 \begin_inset space ~
15919 \begin_layout Standard
15920 XHTML output remains
15921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15928 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15929 features are supported yet.
15933 and the World Wide Web
15937 Additional Features
15939 manual, for more information.
15942 \begin_layout Standard
15943 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15945 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15946 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15952 \begin_layout Subsection
15954 \begin_inset Index idx
15957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15966 \begin_layout Standard
15967 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15968 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15977 or use the toolbar button
15984 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15985 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
15986 \begin_inset space ~
15990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15992 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15996 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15998 \begin_inset space ~
16002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16004 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16009 Further output formats can be selected via
16011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16012 View (Other Formats)
16014 or the toolbar button
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16025 viewer window using the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16033 Update (Other Formats)
16038 \begin_layout Standard
16039 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16042 To have a real output, export your document.
16045 \begin_layout Section
16046 A few Words about Typography
16047 \begin_inset Index idx
16050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16059 \begin_layout Subsection
16060 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16061 \begin_inset Index idx
16064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 In \SpecialChar LyX
16086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16097 character comes in four variants: the
16114 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16120 \begin_layout Standard
16121 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16131 height_special "totalheight"
16136 backgroundcolor "none"
16139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16140 \begin_inset Tabular
16141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16143 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16146 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16215 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 system key combination
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16243 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16247 and the em dash with
16249 Shift-Option-hyphen
16255 is the Mac label for the right
16264 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16268 \begin_inset space ~
16271 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16283 function with the Unicode code as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16303 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 system key combination or
16327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16354 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16393 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16399 \begin_layout Standard
16400 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16401 mode and has a length of its own.
16402 Here are some examples:
16405 \begin_layout Enumerate
16406 line- and page-breaks
16407 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16417 \begin_layout Enumerate
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16433 \begin_layout Enumerate
16434 Dashes indicate interruptions, performing a function related to – but subtly
16435 different from – parentheses.
16436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16460 \begin_layout Enumerate
16461 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16465 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16475 \begin_layout Standard
16477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16479 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16480 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16488 \begin_layout Subsection
16489 Dashes and line breaks
16490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16492 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16499 \begin_layout Standard
16500 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16504 \begin_layout Itemize
16505 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16508 \begin_layout Itemize
16509 In English, lines may break after dashes used to set off parenthetical statement
16513 \begin_layout Itemize
16514 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16515 similar to quote signs and line breaks are not allowed on the left side.
16518 \begin_layout Standard
16519 When using spaced en dashes
16520 \begin_inset space ~
16523 - common in British English
16524 \begin_inset space ~
16527 - line breaks before the dash with protected spaces are not allowed.
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16532 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16534 optional line breaks with the menu
16536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16537 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16538 Optional line break
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16544 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16548 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16549 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16550 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16553 This forces the output of dashes as
16554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16569 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16571 The \SpecialChar TeX
16572 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16573 by an optional line break.
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16580 \begin_layout Enumerate
16581 This results in optional line breaks after
16586 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16593 Prevent Hyphenation
16598 \begin_inset space ~
16614 in \SpecialChar TeX
16619 \begin_layout Itemize
16621 \begin_inset space ~
16625 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16635 height_special "totalheight"
16640 backgroundcolor "none"
16643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16652 \begin_layout Itemize
16656 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16666 height_special "totalheight"
16671 backgroundcolor "none"
16674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16678 \begin_inset space ~
16686 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16687 \begin_inset space ~
16690 – sont très utiles.
16693 \begin_layout Itemize
16700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16709 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16714 \begin_inset space ~
16717 – in contrast to an overfull line
16718 \begin_inset space ~
16721 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16726 \begin_layout Enumerate
16727 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16732 \begin_layout Standard
16738 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16742 \begin_inset Newline newline
16749 XeTeXdashbreakstate=1
16751 causes literal dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16755 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_layout Enumerate
16772 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16775 \begin_layout Standard
16776 In \SpecialChar LyX
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16781 2.2 -- and --- were in \SpecialChar LyX
16783 \begin_inset space ~
16786 2.3 output as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation to dashes.
16790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16791 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16796 2.1 -- and --- in \SpecialChar LyX
16797 was output unchanged which led to different look in the
16798 within \SpecialChar LyX
16799 , text export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16804 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16805 This lead to problems like different line breaks.
16806 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16808 \begin_inset space ~
16811 2.3 there is the option
16813 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16818 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16822 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16824 \begin_inset space ~
16828 \begin_inset Newline newline
16831 Note the following side-effects of the \SpecialChar LyX
16835 \begin_layout Itemize
16836 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16841 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect the option to ensure unchanged
16845 \begin_layout Itemize
16846 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16847 documents that follow literal
16848 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16850 \begin_inset space ~
16854 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16855 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16860 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost!
16863 \begin_layout Subsection
16865 \begin_inset Index idx
16868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16877 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16884 \begin_layout Standard
16885 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16886 but automatically in the output.
16887 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16893 \begin_inset Index idx
16896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16903 following the rules of the document language.
16906 \begin_layout Standard
16908 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16912 font and with unusual constructs, like
16913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16921 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16922 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16923 This is done with the menu
16925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16928 \begin_inset space ~
16934 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16936 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16941 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16942 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16953 would then see the hyphen
16954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16961 as a hyphenation possibility.
16962 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16963 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
16966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16967 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16970 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
16972 Prevent Hyphenation
16977 \begin_inset space ~
16985 \begin_layout Subsection
16987 \begin_inset Index idx
16990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17000 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17003 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17010 \begin_layout Standard
17011 When \SpecialChar LyX
17012 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17013 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17015 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17021 appropriate amount of space.
17022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17025 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17027 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17028 gets after another word.
17031 \begin_layout Standard
17032 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17033 not work in all cases.
17035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17046 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17047 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17050 \begin_layout Standard
17051 Here are some examples of
17055 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17058 \begin_layout Itemize
17063 \begin_layout Itemize
17068 \begin_layout Standard
17069 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17072 \begin_layout Itemize
17074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17078 this is too much space!
17081 \begin_layout Itemize
17086 \begin_layout Standard
17087 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17090 \begin_layout Standard
17091 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17094 \begin_layout Enumerate
17098 \begin_inset space ~
17103 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17104 \begin_inset space ~
17108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17110 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17115 \begin_inset Index idx
17118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17119 Spaces ! inter-word
17127 \begin_layout Enumerate
17131 \begin_inset space ~
17136 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17137 \begin_inset space ~
17141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17143 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17148 \begin_inset Index idx
17151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17160 \begin_layout Enumerate
17164 \begin_inset space ~
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17181 \begin_inset space ~
17186 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17187 This function is also bound to
17190 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17196 \begin_layout Standard
17197 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17200 \begin_layout Itemize
17202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17206 \begin_inset space \space{}
17209 this is too much space!
17212 \begin_layout Itemize
17213 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17218 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17219 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17221 will take care of this.
17224 \begin_layout Standard
17225 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17235 feature described in the section
17237 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17242 Additional Features
17247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17249 \begin_inset Index idx
17252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17253 Typography ! Quotation marks
17259 \begin_inset Index idx
17262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17263 Quotation marks | see
17267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17293 \begin_layout Standard
17295 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17296 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17297 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17307 The keyboard character,
17311 , generates this automatically.
17314 \begin_layout Standard
17315 You can specify what character the
17319 key produces by using the submenu
17325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17333 Document ! Settings
17338 dialog and switching the
17342 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17343 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17345 \begin_inset space ~
17351 \begin_layout Labeling
17352 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17364 \begin_inset space ~
17368 \begin_inset space ~
17372 \begin_inset Quotes els
17376 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17390 \begin_inset Quotes els
17394 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17397 quotation marks (as common, e.
17398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17404 \begin_layout Labeling
17405 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17408 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17412 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17416 \begin_inset space ~
17420 \begin_inset space ~
17424 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17428 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17434 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17438 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17442 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17446 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17449 quotation marks (as common, e.
17450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17456 \begin_layout Labeling
17457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17460 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17476 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17480 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17486 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17490 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17494 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17498 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17501 quotation marks (as common, e.
17502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17508 \begin_layout Labeling
17509 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17512 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17516 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17520 \begin_inset space ~
17524 \begin_inset space ~
17528 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17532 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17538 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17542 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17546 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17550 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17553 quotation marks (as common, e.
17554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17560 \begin_layout Labeling
17561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17564 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17568 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17572 \begin_inset space ~
17576 \begin_inset space ~
17580 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17584 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17590 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17594 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17598 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17602 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17605 quotation marks (as common, e.
17606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17609 g., in Switzerland)
17612 \begin_layout Labeling
17613 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17616 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17620 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset space ~
17632 \begin_inset Quotes als
17636 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17642 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17646 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17650 \begin_inset Quotes als
17654 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17657 quotation marks (as common, e.
17658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17664 \begin_layout Labeling
17665 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17668 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17672 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17680 \begin_inset space ~
17684 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17688 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17694 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17702 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17706 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17709 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17712 \begin_layout Labeling
17713 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17716 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17720 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17724 \begin_inset space ~
17728 \begin_inset space ~
17732 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17736 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17742 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17746 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17750 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17754 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17757 quotation marks (as common, e.
17758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17761 g., in Great Britain)
17764 \begin_layout Labeling
17765 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17768 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17772 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17776 \begin_inset space ~
17780 \begin_inset space ~
17784 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17788 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17794 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17798 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17802 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17806 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17809 quotation marks (as common, e.
17810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17816 \begin_layout Labeling
17817 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17820 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17824 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17828 \begin_inset space ~
17832 \begin_inset space ~
17836 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17840 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17846 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17850 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17854 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17858 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17861 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17866 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17867 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17868 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17869 the inner marks differ).
17877 \begin_layout Labeling
17878 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17881 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17885 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17901 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17907 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17911 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17915 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17919 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17922 quotation marks (as common, e.
17923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17929 \begin_layout Labeling
17930 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17933 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17937 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17941 \begin_inset space ~
17945 \begin_inset space ~
17949 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17959 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17963 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17967 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17971 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17974 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17977 \begin_layout Labeling
17978 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17979 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17987 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17993 \begin_inset space ~
17997 \begin_inset space ~
18003 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18011 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18015 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18019 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18023 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18027 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18030 quotation marks (as common, e.
18031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18040 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18048 \begin_layout Labeling
18049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18050 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18058 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18074 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18082 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18086 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18090 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18094 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18098 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18101 quotation marks (as common, e.
18102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18105 g., in North Korea and China)
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18111 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18119 \begin_layout Standard
18120 Inner quotation marks
18124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18126 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18127 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18135 does not necessarily mean
18136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18144 This is why we call them
18145 \begin_inset Quotes els
18149 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18165 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18167 \begin_inset Quotes els
18171 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18174 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18177 arg "quote-insert inner"
18182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18188 \begin_layout Standard
18189 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18190 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18191 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18192 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18193 If you check the setting
18195 Use dynamic quotation marks
18199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18203 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18204 they appear in a special color).
18205 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18206 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18211 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 Individual quotation marks (i.
18216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18219 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18220 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18224 \begin_layout Subsection
18226 \begin_inset Index idx
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 Typography ! Ligatures
18236 \begin_inset Index idx
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18270 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18277 \begin_layout Standard
18278 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18279 print them as single characters.
18280 These groups are known as
18285 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18286 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18288 Here are the standard ligatures:
18291 \begin_layout Itemize
18295 \begin_layout Itemize
18299 \begin_layout Itemize
18303 \begin_layout Itemize
18307 \begin_layout Itemize
18311 \begin_layout Standard
18312 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18315 \begin_layout Standard
18316 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18317 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18341 To break a ligature, use
18343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18364 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18381 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18389 \begin_layout Subsection
18391 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18393 \begin_inset Index idx
18396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18406 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18413 \begin_layout Standard
18416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18421 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18424 \begin_layout Description
18426 The name of the game.
18429 \begin_layout Description
18431 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18435 \begin_layout Description
18437 The \SpecialChar TeX
18438 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18442 \begin_layout Description
18443 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18444 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18448 \begin_layout Standard
18449 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18455 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18464 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18465 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18466 converges to the number
18467 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18470 : The actual version is
18471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18479 , the previous one was
18480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18491 \begin_layout Subsection
18493 \begin_inset Index idx
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18505 \begin_layout Standard
18506 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18507 space between two words.
18508 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 for units use the menu
18520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18523 \begin_inset space ~
18531 arg "space-insert thin"
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18538 Here is an example to show the differences:
18541 \begin_layout Standard
18542 \begin_inset Tabular
18543 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18544 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18545 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18546 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 \begin_inset space ~
18557 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 space between number and unit
18576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18585 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18597 half space between number and unit
18610 \begin_layout Subsection
18612 \begin_inset Index idx
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18624 \begin_layout Standard
18625 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18627 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18628 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18629 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18630 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18631 These bits of text became known as
18642 \begin_layout Standard
18643 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18644 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18645 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18646 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18647 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18648 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18649 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18650 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18651 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18652 \begin_inset Newline newline
18660 \begin_inset Newline newline
18668 \begin_inset Newline newline
18671 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18672 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18673 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18675 \begin_inset space ~
18679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18681 key "latexcompanion"
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18698 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18699 's page break mechanism.
18702 \begin_layout Chapter
18703 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18706 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18723 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18726 \begin_layout Section
18728 \begin_inset Index idx
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18747 \begin_layout Standard
18749 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18752 \begin_layout Description
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18758 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18759 \begin_inset Newline newline
18763 \begin_inset Note Note
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18775 \begin_layout Description
18776 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18777 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18778 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18782 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18784 \begin_inset space ~
18790 \begin_inset Newline newline
18794 \begin_inset Note Comment
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18807 \begin_layout Description
18809 \begin_inset space ~
18812 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18813 set in the document settings under
18815 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18817 \begin_inset space ~
18823 \begin_inset Newline newline
18827 \begin_inset Newline newline
18831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18841 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18846 of a comment that appears in the output.
18852 \begin_inset Newline newline
18856 \begin_inset Newline newline
18859 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18862 \begin_layout Standard
18863 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18875 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18878 \begin_layout Section
18880 \begin_inset Index idx
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18892 name "sec:Footnotes"
18899 \begin_layout Standard
18901 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18907 or the toolbar button
18910 arg "footnote-insert"
18922 \begin_inset Graphics
18923 filename clipart/footnote.png
18932 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18933 's representation of your footnote.
18943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18962 label, the box will
18966 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18967 Clicking on the box label again will close
18980 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18981 and click on the footnote
18996 \begin_layout Standard
18997 Here is an example footnote:
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19015 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19016 position where the footnote box is placed.
19017 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19018 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19019 according to the document class.
19021 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19022 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19028 ey are described in the
19031 \begin_inset space ~
19039 \begin_layout Section
19041 \begin_inset Index idx
19044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19053 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19060 \begin_layout Standard
19061 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19063 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19067 \begin_inset space ~
19072 or the toolbar button
19075 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19101 appearing within your text.
19102 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19103 's representation of your margin
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19117 \begin_inset Marginal
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 This is a marginal note.
19130 \begin_layout Standard
19131 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19132 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19133 pages, right on odd pages.
19136 \begin_layout Standard
19137 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19140 \begin_inset space ~
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19156 \begin_layout Section
19157 Graphics and Images
19158 \begin_inset Index idx
19161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 \begin_inset Index idx
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19180 name "sec:Graphics"
19187 \begin_layout Standard
19188 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19189 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19201 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19204 \begin_layout Standard
19205 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19210 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19211 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19213 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19220 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19232 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19233 of the image in the output.
19234 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19242 \begin_inset space ~
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19255 \begin_inset space ~
19259 \begin_inset space ~
19264 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19265 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19273 \begin_layout Standard
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19286 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19287 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19289 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19299 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19300 with the image size is printed.
19303 \begin_layout Standard
19304 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19305 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19307 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19310 \begin_layout Standard
19312 \begin_inset Graphics
19313 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19321 \begin_layout Standard
19322 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19323 the image into a float, see section
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19330 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19337 \begin_layout Subsection
19339 \begin_inset Index idx
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19351 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19358 \begin_layout Standard
19359 You can insert images in any known file format.
19360 But as we explained in section
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19367 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19371 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19373 therefore uses the program
19377 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19378 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19379 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19380 \begin_inset space ~
19384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19386 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19393 \begin_layout Standard
19394 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19397 \begin_layout Description
19399 \begin_inset space ~
19402 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19403 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19404 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19408 Graphics Interchange Format
19409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19412 (GIF, file extension
19413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19425 \begin_inset Index idx
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19460 Portable Network Graphics
19461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19464 (PNG, file extension
19465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19477 \begin_inset Index idx
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19512 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19516 (JPG, file extension
19517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19541 \begin_inset Index idx
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 \begin_layout Description
19577 \begin_inset space ~
19580 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19582 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19583 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19584 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19585 \begin_inset Newline newline
19588 Scalable image formats can be
19589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19592 Scalable Vector Graphics
19593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19596 (SVG, file extension
19597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19609 \begin_inset Index idx
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19644 Encapsulated PostScript
19645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19648 (EPS, file extension
19649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19661 \begin_inset Index idx
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19696 Portable Document Format
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19700 (PDF, file extension
19701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 \begin_inset Index idx
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19731 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19732 result will not be scalable.
19733 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19747 \begin_layout Standard
19748 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19755 \begin_layout Subsection
19756 Grouping of Image Settings
19757 \begin_inset Index idx
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 Images ! Settings grouping
19769 \begin_layout Standard
19770 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19772 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19773 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19775 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19776 need to manually change each of them.
19780 \begin_layout Standard
19781 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19788 \begin_inset space ~
19800 \begin_inset space ~
19804 \begin_inset space ~
19810 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19811 and checking the name of the desired group.
19814 \begin_layout Section
19816 \begin_inset Index idx
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19835 \begin_layout Standard
19836 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19839 arg "tabular-insert"
19844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19848 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19849 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19850 from the rest of the table.
19851 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19852 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19854 Here is an example table:
19857 \begin_layout Standard
19859 \begin_inset Tabular
19860 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19861 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19863 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 \begin_layout Subsection
20069 \begin_layout Standard
20070 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20073 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20077 This brings up the table dialog.
20078 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20079 cursor is placed currently.
20080 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20081 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20082 done on all of your selection.
20085 \begin_layout Standard
20086 In addition to the table dialog, the
20089 \begin_inset space ~
20094 helps you in setting table properties.
20095 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20098 \begin_layout Standard
20102 \begin_inset space ~
20107 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20108 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20109 current cell respectively.
20110 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20112 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20113 of text, see section
20114 \begin_inset space ~
20118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20120 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20127 \begin_layout Standard
20128 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20129 using the check box
20138 This will merge the cells to
20142 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20143 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20144 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20145 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20146 in the last row without the upper border:
20149 \begin_layout Standard
20151 \begin_inset Tabular
20152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20153 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20155 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 \begin_layout Standard
20289 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20290 -arguments for the table.
20291 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20292 explained in the chapter
20299 \begin_inset space ~
20305 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20306 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20307 but are visible in the output.
20310 \begin_layout Standard
20311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 Most DVI-viewers are
20323 able to display rotations.
20331 \begin_layout Standard
20336 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20341 adds lines for all cell borders.
20344 \begin_layout Subsection
20346 \begin_inset Index idx
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 Tables ! Multi-page
20356 \begin_inset Index idx
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \begin_layout Standard
20369 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20372 \begin_inset space ~
20376 \begin_inset space ~
20384 \begin_inset space ~
20389 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20390 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20393 \begin_layout Description
20398 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20399 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20400 Except for the first page, if
20403 \begin_inset space ~
20411 \begin_layout Description
20415 \begin_inset space ~
20420 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20421 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20424 \begin_layout Description
20429 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20430 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20431 except for the last page, if
20434 \begin_inset space ~
20442 \begin_layout Description
20446 \begin_inset space ~
20451 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20452 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20455 \begin_layout Description
20456 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20457 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20463 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20466 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_layout Standard
20475 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20476 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20477 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20483 In this context, first means first in this order:
20486 \begin_inset space ~
20498 \begin_inset space ~
20503 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20506 \begin_layout Standard
20508 \begin_inset Tabular
20509 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20510 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20511 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20512 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20513 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20514 <row endfirsthead="true">
20515 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20526 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <row endfirsthead="true">
20546 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <row endhead="true">
20579 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <row endhead="true">
20610 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <row endfoot="true">
20643 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21635 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <row endlastfoot="true">
22625 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 \begin_layout Subsection
22664 \begin_inset Index idx
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22676 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22683 \begin_layout Standard
22684 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22685 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22686 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22687 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22691 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22694 \begin_layout Standard
22695 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22696 for the column in the table dialog.
22697 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22698 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22702 \begin_layout Standard
22704 \begin_inset Tabular
22705 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22706 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22707 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22708 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22709 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 This is longer now.
22859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22910 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22911 This is longer now.
22916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 \begin_layout Standard
22943 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22944 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22950 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22956 Selection with the mouse or with
22960 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22961 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22962 the selection from outside the table.
22965 \begin_layout Section
22967 \begin_inset Index idx
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22986 \begin_layout Subsection
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22992 have a fixed location.
22994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23001 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23009 \begin_inset space ~
23014 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23015 too many notes on the current page.
23018 \begin_layout Standard
23019 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23020 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23021 and pages without text.
23022 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23023 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23024 Floats are therefore numbered.
23025 Referencing is described in section
23026 \begin_inset space ~
23030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23032 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23039 \begin_layout Standard
23040 To insert a float, use the menu
23042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23046 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23047 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23049 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23050 \begin_inset Index idx
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23060 paragraph within the float.
23061 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23062 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23063 left-clicking on the box label.
23064 A closed float box looks like this:
23065 \begin_inset Graphics
23066 filename clipart/float.png
23071 – a gray button with a red label.
23074 \begin_layout Standard
23075 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23077 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23080 \begin_layout Subsection
23082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23084 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23089 \begin_inset Index idx
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23093 Floats ! Figure floats
23101 \begin_layout Standard
23103 \begin_inset space ~
23107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23109 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23113 was created using the menu
23115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23116 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23122 arg "float-insert figure"
23126 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23135 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23139 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23140 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23144 \begin_inset space ~
23152 arg "layout-paragraph"
23158 \begin_layout Standard
23159 \begin_inset Float figure
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 \begin_inset Graphics
23167 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23182 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23186 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23199 \begin_layout Standard
23200 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23201 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23212 ) and refer to it using the menu
23214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23220 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23224 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23225 vague references like
23226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23233 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23234 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23244 For more about cross-references, see section
23245 \begin_inset space ~
23249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23251 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23258 \begin_layout Standard
23259 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23260 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23261 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23262 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23263 as described in section
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23270 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23276 \begin_inset space ~
23280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23282 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23286 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23287 You can also set the images one below the other.
23289 \begin_inset space ~
23293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23295 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23302 reference "fig:Platypus"
23306 are the subfigures.
23309 \begin_layout Standard
23310 \begin_inset Float figure
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23320 \begin_inset Float figure
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23326 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23331 name "fig:Undefinable"
23343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 \begin_inset Graphics
23345 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23356 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23360 \begin_inset Float figure
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23371 name "fig:Platypus"
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 \begin_inset Graphics
23385 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23397 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23409 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23413 Two distorted images.
23426 \begin_layout Subsection
23428 \begin_inset Index idx
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 Floats ! Table floats
23440 \begin_layout Standard
23441 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23444 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23447 or the toolbar button
23450 arg "float-insert table"
23454 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23455 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23456 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23458 \begin_inset space ~
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23464 reference "tab:Table-float"
23471 \begin_layout Standard
23472 \begin_inset Float table
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23483 name "tab:Table-float"
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 \begin_inset Tabular
23498 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23499 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23500 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23502 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23653 \end{array}\right]$
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23674 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23695 \begin_layout Subsection
23697 \begin_inset Index idx
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 \begin_layout Standard
23711 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23712 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23713 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23715 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23723 \begin_inset space ~
23731 \begin_layout Section
23733 \begin_inset Index idx
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23747 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23749 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23750 \begin_inset space \space{}
23757 \begin_layout Standard
23758 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23759 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23765 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23766 and its alignment within the page.
23769 \begin_layout Standard
23771 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23781 height_special "totalheight"
23786 backgroundcolor "none"
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 This is a minipage.
23793 The text is set in an italic style.
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23800 another formatting.
23808 \begin_layout Standard
23809 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23812 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23816 as described in section
23817 \begin_inset space ~
23821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23823 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23828 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23834 \begin_layout Standard
23835 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23845 height_special "totalheight"
23850 backgroundcolor "none"
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23855 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23861 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23865 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23875 height_special "totalheight"
23880 backgroundcolor "none"
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23885 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23893 \begin_layout Standard
23894 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23903 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23910 \begin_inset space ~
23918 \begin_layout Chapter
23919 Mathematical Formulas
23920 \begin_inset Index idx
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 \begin_inset Index idx
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23964 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23971 \begin_layout Standard
23972 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23977 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23980 \begin_layout Section
23982 \begin_inset Index idx
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 \begin_layout Standard
23995 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24008 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24010 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24011 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24012 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24020 \begin_layout Standard
24021 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24025 \begin_inset space ~
24030 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24033 \begin_layout Standard
24034 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24035 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24038 \begin_layout Standard
24039 This is a line with an inline formula
24040 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24046 \begin_layout Standard
24047 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24048 paragraph, like this one:
24049 \begin_inset Formula
24056 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24059 \begin_layout Standard
24061 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24063 For example, typing
24064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24077 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24078 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24082 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24085 \begin_inset space ~
24093 \begin_layout Subsection
24094 Navigating in Formulas
24095 \begin_inset Index idx
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 \begin_layout Standard
24108 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24109 achieved with the arrow keys.
24111 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24112 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24117 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24122 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24126 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24129 \end{array}\right]$
24137 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24142 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24143 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24146 \begin_layout Standard
24151 , printed in this document as
24152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24156 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24163 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24164 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24165 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24170 For example, if you want
24171 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24179 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24189 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24193 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24198 , since in the latter case only the
24201 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24206 will be under the square root sign:
24207 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24213 \begin_layout Standard
24214 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24216 \begin_inset Formula
24218 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24227 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24228 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24231 \begin_layout Subsection
24235 \begin_layout Standard
24236 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24237 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24241 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24242 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24243 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24244 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24245 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24249 \begin_layout Subsection
24250 Exponents and Subscripts
24251 \begin_inset Index idx
24254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 \begin_inset Index idx
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 \begin_layout Standard
24274 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24277 arg "math-superscript"
24283 arg "math-subscript"
24286 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24288 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24291 , type in a formula
24294 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24304 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24310 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24314 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24320 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24326 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24335 , you have to use an extra
24339 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24340 For example, if you want
24341 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24347 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24353 Subscripts are similar: To get
24354 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24360 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24368 \begin_layout Subsection
24370 \begin_inset Index idx
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 \begin_layout Standard
24383 Create a fraction either with the command
24389 or by using the icon
24392 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24398 \begin_inset space ~
24404 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24405 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24406 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24411 To move back up, press
24416 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24417 \begin_inset Formula
24419 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24422 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24430 \begin_layout Subsection
24432 \begin_inset Index idx
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 \begin_layout Standard
24445 Roots can be created using the
24448 \begin_inset space ~
24456 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24462 arg "math-insert \\root"
24484 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24490 always produces a square root.
24493 \begin_layout Subsection
24494 Operators with Limits
24495 \begin_inset Index idx
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 \begin_inset Index idx
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24517 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24524 \begin_layout Standard
24526 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24530 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24533 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24534 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24535 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24536 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24537 The sum operator will automatically place its
24538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24545 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24547 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24551 \begin_inset Formula
24553 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24558 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24562 \begin_layout Standard
24563 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24565 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24566 behind the operator and using the menu
24568 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24569 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24571 \begin_inset space ~
24575 \begin_inset space ~
24589 \begin_layout Standard
24590 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24599 \begin_inset Index idx
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24609 \begin_inset Formula
24611 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24616 which will place the
24617 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24629 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24630 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24636 \begin_layout Standard
24637 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24644 Have a look at section
24645 \begin_inset space ~
24649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24651 reference "subsec:Functions"
24655 for an explanation of function macros.
24658 \begin_layout Subsection
24660 \begin_inset Index idx
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 \begin_layout Standard
24673 Most math symbols can be found in the
24676 \begin_inset space ~
24681 under one of several categories; including
24698 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24702 \begin_layout Standard
24703 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24704 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24705 don't have to use the
24708 \begin_inset space ~
24713 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24715 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24718 \begin_layout Subsection
24720 \begin_inset Index idx
24723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 \begin_layout Standard
24733 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24739 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24745 \begin_inset space ~
24753 arg "math-insert \\space"
24757 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24758 For example, the sequence
24763 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24766 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24768 \begin_inset Graphics
24769 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24774 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24775 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24776 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24777 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24778 , because they are negative
24780 Here are two examples:
24783 \begin_layout Standard
24793 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24799 \begin_layout Standard
24809 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24815 \begin_layout Subsection
24817 \begin_inset Index idx
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24829 name "subsec:Functions"
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24840 \begin_inset space ~
24845 contains under the button
24848 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24851 a number of function macros, such as
24852 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24856 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24864 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24871 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24872 avoid confusions, because
24873 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24877 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24883 \begin_layout Standard
24884 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24886 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24890 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24896 \begin_layout Standard
24897 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24898 are placed, as described in section
24899 \begin_inset space ~
24903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24905 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24912 \begin_layout Subsection
24914 \begin_inset Index idx
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 \begin_layout Standard
24927 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24929 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24930 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24931 commands, for example, to enter
24932 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24935 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24936 Our example is entered by typing
24941 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24948 \begin_inset space ~
24952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24954 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24958 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24961 \begin_layout Standard
24962 \begin_inset Float table
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24973 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24977 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 \begin_inset Tabular
24988 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24989 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24990 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24991 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25400 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25553 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25574 \begin_layout Standard
25575 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25578 \begin_inset space ~
25586 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25589 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25593 \begin_layout Section
25594 Brackets and Delimiters
25595 \begin_inset Index idx
25598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25605 \begin_inset Index idx
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25617 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25627 For some purposes, using just the keys
25632 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25633 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25634 toolbar delimiter icon
25637 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25641 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25642 \begin_inset Formula
25644 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25652 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25653 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25657 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25660 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25666 \begin_inset Formula
25668 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25676 \begin_layout Standard
25677 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25678 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25682 \begin_layout Standard
25683 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25684 left side and right side.
25685 If you use the option
25688 \begin_inset space ~
25693 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25694 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25696 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25701 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25702 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25705 \begin_layout Standard
25706 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25707 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25708 is to go inside the brackets.
25709 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25714 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25715 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25716 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25720 arg "math-delim ( )"
25726 \begin_layout Section
25727 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25728 \begin_inset Index idx
25731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25738 \begin_inset Index idx
25741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25748 \begin_inset Index idx
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25761 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25765 \begin_inset space ~
25773 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25777 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25778 Here is an example:
25779 \begin_inset Formula
25781 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25790 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25791 \begin_inset space ~
25795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25797 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25802 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25803 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25804 This alignment is set in the box
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25858 for every column as default.
25859 For example, the sequence
25860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25871 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25872 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25873 corresponds to the relevant column.
25874 The result will look like this:
25875 \begin_inset Formula
25878 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25879 column & has & has\,right\\
25880 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25893 arg "newline-insert newline"
25896 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25897 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25899 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25902 or the math toolbar.
25905 \begin_layout Standard
25906 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25907 It can be created with the menu
25909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25910 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25912 \begin_inset space ~
25924 Here is an example:
25925 \begin_inset Formula
25939 \begin_layout Standard
25940 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25943 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25946 arg "newline-insert newline"
25950 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25955 arg "newline-insert newline"
25958 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25966 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25967 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25968 A new row is created by every further entry of
25971 arg "newline-insert newline"
25975 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25976 Here is an example:
25977 \begin_inset Formula
25979 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25980 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25985 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25986 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25987 \begin_inset Formula
25989 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25997 \begin_layout Standard
25998 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26005 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26006 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26009 reference "eq:asquared"
26014 The other types are described in section
26015 \begin_inset space ~
26019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26021 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26028 \begin_layout Section
26029 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26030 \begin_inset Index idx
26033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 Math ! Formula numbering
26040 \begin_inset Index idx
26043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26044 Math ! Referencing formulas
26050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26052 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26062 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26063 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26065 \begin_inset space ~
26069 \begin_inset space ~
26077 arg "math-number-toggle"
26081 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26082 within parentheses.
26083 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26084 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26085 the document class.
26086 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26087 separated by a dot:
26088 \begin_inset Formula
26098 arg "math-number-toggle"
26101 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26102 You can only number displayed formulas.
26105 \begin_layout Standard
26106 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26109 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset space ~
26123 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26126 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26127 \begin_inset Formula
26130 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26136 To number all lines use the shortcut
26139 arg "math-number-toggle"
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26149 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26150 A label is inserted with the menu
26152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26161 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26162 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26163 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26175 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26176 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26177 We inserted in the following example the label
26178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26185 in the second line:
26186 \begin_inset Formula
26188 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26189 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26194 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26195 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26196 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26208 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26212 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26213 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26214 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26215 as the formula number:
26218 \begin_layout Standard
26219 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26222 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26229 \begin_layout Standard
26230 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26231 's cross-reference box are described in section
26232 \begin_inset space ~
26236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26238 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26243 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26251 \begin_layout Section
26252 User defined math macros
26253 \begin_inset Index idx
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26267 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26268 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26269 Math macros are explained in section
26272 \begin_inset space ~
26284 \begin_layout Section
26288 \begin_layout Subsection
26290 \begin_inset Index idx
26293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 \begin_layout Standard
26303 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26304 To set a font in a formula, use the
26307 \begin_inset space ~
26315 arg "math-insert \\font"
26318 , or enter its command, listed in table
26319 \begin_inset space ~
26323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26325 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26332 \begin_layout Standard
26333 \begin_inset Float table
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26339 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26344 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26348 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26358 \begin_inset Tabular
26359 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26360 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26361 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26362 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26535 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 \begin_layout Standard
26631 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26655 \begin_layout Standard
26656 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26657 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26662 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26663 space when you need a space in the box.
26664 Here is an example where
26665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26676 denotes the set of numbers:
26677 \begin_inset Formula
26679 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26687 \begin_layout Standard
26688 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26689 You can, for example, put a character in
26698 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26702 \begin_inset Newline newline
26705 So it is better not to use this feature.
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26709 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26710 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26714 \begin_inset Newline newline
26717 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26723 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26724 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26730 \begin_layout Standard
26737 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26744 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26746 \begin_inset space ~
26754 \begin_layout Subsection
26756 \begin_inset Index idx
26759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26768 \begin_layout Standard
26769 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26771 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26775 \begin_inset space ~
26779 \begin_inset space ~
26787 \begin_inset space ~
26795 arg "math-insert \\font"
26799 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26800 in black instead of blue.
26801 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26802 Here is an example:
26803 \begin_inset Formula
26806 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26807 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26816 \begin_layout Subsection
26818 \begin_inset Index idx
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 \begin_layout Standard
26831 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26832 automatically chosen in most situations.
26850 For most characters,
26858 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26859 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26864 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26865 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26866 thinks are appropriate.
26867 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26870 arg "math-insert \\style"
26874 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26875 For example, you can set
26876 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26879 , which is normally in
26888 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26892 The four styles are used in the following example:
26895 \begin_layout Standard
26896 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26900 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26904 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26908 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26916 is set in a particular size with the menu
26918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26920 \begin_inset space ~
26925 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26926 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26927 will be adjusted to correspond.
26928 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26939 \begin_layout Standard
26943 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26949 \begin_layout Section
26950 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26952 \begin_inset Index idx
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 \begin_inset Index idx
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26976 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26977 that are in common use.
26980 \begin_layout Subsection
26981 Enabling AMS-Support
26984 \begin_layout Standard
26985 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26986 the document by selecting the checkbox
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26993 \begin_inset space ~
26997 \begin_inset space ~
27004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27008 \begin_inset Index idx
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27012 Document ! Settings
27020 \begin_inset space ~
27026 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27027 -errors in formulas,
27028 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27031 \begin_layout Subsection
27033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27035 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27040 \begin_inset Index idx
27043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27044 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27053 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27054 provides a selection of different formula types.
27056 allows you to choose between
27077 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27078 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27085 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27088 \begin_layout Chapter
27092 \begin_layout Section
27094 \begin_inset Index idx
27097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27106 name "sec:Cross-References"
27113 \begin_layout Standard
27114 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27115 's strengths is cross-references.
27116 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27118 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27119 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27120 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27123 \begin_layout Enumerate
27127 \begin_layout Enumerate
27128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27130 name "enu:Second-item"
27137 \begin_layout Enumerate
27141 \begin_layout Standard
27142 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27147 or by pressing the toolbar button
27154 A gray label box like this:
27155 \begin_inset Graphics
27156 filename clipart/label.png
27160 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27162 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27197 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27198 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27214 \begin_layout Standard
27215 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27220 or the toolbar button
27223 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27227 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27228 \begin_inset Graphics
27229 filename clipart/reference.png
27233 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27235 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27248 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27252 \begin_layout Standard
27253 As an alternative to
27255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27258 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27263 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27264 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27266 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27279 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27280 \begin_inset space ~
27284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27286 reference "enu:Second-item"
27293 \begin_layout Standard
27294 It is recommended to use a protected space
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 described in section
27300 \begin_inset space ~
27304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27306 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27315 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27316 line breaks between them.
27319 \begin_layout Standard
27320 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27323 \begin_layout Description
27324 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27327 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27334 \begin_layout Description
27335 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27336 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27348 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27355 \begin_layout Description
27356 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27357 \begin_inset space ~
27361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27362 LatexCommand pageref
27363 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27370 \begin_layout Description
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27376 \begin_inset space ~
27379 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27381 LatexCommand vpageref
27382 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27387 \begin_inset Newline newline
27390 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27391 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27392 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27393 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27394 it prints “on the next page”.
27395 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27398 \begin_layout Description
27400 \begin_inset space ~
27404 \begin_inset space ~
27408 \begin_inset space ~
27411 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27414 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27419 \begin_inset Newline newline
27422 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27428 ; otherwise it behaves like
27432 \begin_inset space ~
27436 \begin_inset space ~
27445 \begin_layout Description
27447 \begin_inset space ~
27450 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27451 \begin_inset Newline newline
27455 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27473 \begin_inset Index idx
27476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 packages ! prettyref
27484 \begin_inset Index idx
27487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27489 packages ! refstyle
27500 \begin_inset Newline newline
27503 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27504 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27507 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27520 is the default and preferred because
27524 supports only English documents.
27525 The format is specified by using the command
27537 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27538 preamble of the document.
27539 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27557 \begin_inset Newline newline
27564 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27569 \begin_inset Newline newline
27580 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27581 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27583 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27584 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27589 , you might do so as follows:
27590 \begin_inset Newline newline
27597 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27602 \begin_inset Newline newline
27605 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27606 the package documentation
27607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27609 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27615 \begin_inset Newline newline
27626 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27633 \begin_layout Description
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27638 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27640 LatexCommand nameref
27641 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27648 \begin_layout Description
27650 \begin_inset space ~
27653 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27654 label for the reference:
27655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27656 LatexCommand labelonly
27657 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27662 \begin_inset Newline newline
27665 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27666 Code, if you want to issue a command
27667 that \SpecialChar LyX
27673 , then you may want to use the
27676 \begin_inset space ~
27681 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27691 This is the form needed for e.
27692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27696 \begin_inset space \space{}
27703 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27704 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27706 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27710 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27715 You can only use the style
27719 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27723 is always possible.
27726 \begin_layout Standard
27727 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27728 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27730 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27731 \begin_inset space ~
27735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27737 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27745 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27749 \begin_inset space ~
27753 \begin_inset space ~
27758 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27759 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27767 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27768 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27771 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27778 You can change labels at any time.
27779 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27780 do not need to think about this.
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27786 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27790 \begin_layout Standard
27791 References are described in detail in the section
27792 \begin_inset space ~
27802 \begin_inset space ~
27810 \begin_layout Section
27811 Table of Contents and other Listings
27812 \begin_inset Index idx
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27822 \begin_inset Index idx
27825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27826 Navigating ! Outline
27832 \begin_inset Index idx
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27851 \begin_layout Subsection
27853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27855 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27863 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27866 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27868 \begin_inset space ~
27872 \begin_inset space ~
27878 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27880 If you click on it, the
27884 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27885 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27886 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27888 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27890 \begin_inset space ~
27895 that is described in section
27896 \begin_inset space ~
27900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27902 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27909 \begin_layout Standard
27910 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27911 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27913 \begin_inset space ~
27917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27919 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27923 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27925 \begin_inset space ~
27929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27931 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27935 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27937 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27940 \begin_layout Subsection
27941 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27944 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27951 \begin_layout Standard
27952 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27954 You can insert them via the
27956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27960 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27963 \begin_layout Section
27964 URLs and Hyperlinks
27965 \begin_inset Index idx
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 \begin_inset Index idx
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 \begin_layout Subsection
27989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27998 \begin_layout Standard
27999 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28007 \begin_layout Standard
28008 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28010 \begin_inset Flex URL
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28023 \begin_layout Standard
28024 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28030 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28034 \begin_layout Standard
28035 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28043 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28052 \begin_layout Subsection
28054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28056 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28063 \begin_layout Standard
28064 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28069 or with the toolbar button
28076 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28085 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28086 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28089 name "LyX's homepage"
28090 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28095 , an Email address like this:
28096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28098 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28099 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28105 , or a link to a file.
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28122 to the link target.
28125 \begin_layout Standard
28126 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28127 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28128 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28129 the text style dialog.
28130 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28136 name "LyX's homepage"
28137 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28150 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28153 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28157 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28159 \begin_inset Newline newline
28167 \begin_inset Newline newline
28174 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28177 \begin_layout Section
28179 \begin_inset Index idx
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28191 name "sec:Appendices"
28198 \begin_layout Standard
28199 Appendices are created with the menu
28201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28207 \begin_inset space ~
28213 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28214 as the appendix part of the book.
28215 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28219 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28220 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28221 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28222 and the subsection number.
28223 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28229 \begin_inset space ~
28233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28235 reference "chap:Credits"
28240 \begin_inset space ~
28244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28246 reference "subsec:Export"
28253 \begin_layout Section
28255 \begin_inset Index idx
28258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28267 name "sec:Bibliography"
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28275 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28277 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28278 \begin_inset space ~
28282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28284 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28291 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28296 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28297 \begin_inset space ~
28301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28303 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28308 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28309 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28310 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28314 using a bibliography database.
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28319 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28323 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28324 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28325 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28326 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28327 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28330 \begin_layout Subsection
28331 The Bibliography Environment
28332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28334 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28341 \begin_layout Standard
28346 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28348 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28357 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28359 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28360 of ASCII characters only.
28364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28369 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28375 \begin_inset Newline newline
28379 \begin_inset Flex URL
28382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28384 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28396 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28406 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28415 or the toolbar button
28418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28422 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28423 containing the available citations.
28424 Select one or more keys from the list and
28434 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28435 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28440 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28441 entry with surrounding brackets.
28446 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28447 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28463 Companion Second Edition
28466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28468 key "latexcompanion"
28476 \begin_layout Standard
28477 The \SpecialChar LyX
28478 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28489 \begin_layout Standard
28490 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28497 \begin_inset Index idx
28500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28508 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28520 Author A and Author B(Year)
28521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28528 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28530 Then, if you select
28533 \begin_inset space ~
28538 in the document settings
28539 \begin_inset Index idx
28542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28543 Document ! Settings
28550 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28552 \begin_inset space ~
28558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28560 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28567 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28574 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28576 \begin_inset space ~
28584 arg "layout-paragraph"
28588 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28591 \begin_layout Subsection
28592 Bibliography databases
28593 \begin_inset Index idx
28596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 Bibliography ! Databases
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28605 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28613 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28619 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28621 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28622 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28627 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28629 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28630 your working field in a database.
28631 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28632 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28633 list for that document.
28634 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28638 \begin_layout Standard
28639 The database is a text file with the file extension
28640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28651 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28652 The format is explained in
28653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28660 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28662 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28664 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28670 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28671 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28672 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28674 \begin_inset Flex URL
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28687 \begin_layout Standard
28689 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28690 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28691 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28693 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28695 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28696 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28697 Those are addressed by
28702 \begin_inset Index idx
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 packages ! biblatex
28713 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28714 (although it has been significantly
28715 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28726 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28727 might conversely fail to correctly
28728 handle databases that use specific
28737 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28741 \begin_layout Standard
28742 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28747 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28753 \begin_inset Index idx
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 Document ! Settings
28769 \begin_inset space ~
28774 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28783 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28785 \begin_inset Index idx
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28789 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28799 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28807 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28809 \begin_inset space ~
28815 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28816 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28824 Add bibliography to TOC
28826 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28831 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28832 in the document or just the cited references.
28835 \begin_layout Standard
28836 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28837 style file is a text file with the file extension
28838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28849 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28850 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28851 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28852 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28854 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28860 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28861 \begin_inset Newline newline
28865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28867 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28877 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28882 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28887 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28892 \begin_inset Index idx
28895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28896 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28902 \begin_inset Index idx
28905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 packages ! biblatex
28915 \begin_layout Standard
28916 Accessing a database via
28920 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28928 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28930 \begin_inset space ~
28936 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28937 you cannot select a
28942 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28946 \begin_layout Standard
28951 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28964 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28965 file (text file with the file extension
28966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28977 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28978 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
28980 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
28984 \begin_layout Standard
28989 styles are not set in the
28992 \begin_inset space ~
28997 dialog, but in the document settings.
28998 \begin_inset Index idx
29001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29002 Document ! Settings
29007 However, in the dialog in the
29011 field, which is only visible if you use
29015 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29016 example how its heading will appear).
29017 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29032 \begin_layout Standard
29033 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29034 \begin_inset space ~
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29040 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29051 Bibliography Processors
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29056 uses a bibliography processor,
29057 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29058 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29059 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29061 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29062 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29065 \begin_layout Standard
29066 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29068 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29069 You can do this on a general level in
29071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29072 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29073 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29076 or for individual documents in
29078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29079 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29083 The following variants are available by default:
29086 \begin_layout Description
29087 biber a specific, modern processor
29088 \begin_inset Index idx
29091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29098 developed exclusively for
29102 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29108 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29113 makes use of; if you use the
29117 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29124 \begin_layout Description
29125 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29126 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29127 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29131 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29134 \begin_layout Description
29135 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29136 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29140 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29144 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29148 features are supported.
29151 \begin_layout Standard
29152 By default (with the
29158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29159 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29173 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29174 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29177 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29178 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29191 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29192 -based bibliography styles).
29193 This should suit most needs.
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29198 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29199 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29204 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29205 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29206 You can adjust it in
29208 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29209 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29210 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29216 \begin_layout Standard
29217 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29218 can add below the selection.
29219 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29220 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29240 \begin_layout Standard
29242 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29244 These are explained in detail in section
29246 Customizing Bibliographies
29250 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29255 Additional Features
29260 \begin_layout Subsection
29262 \begin_inset Index idx
29265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29266 Bibliography ! Citation format
29272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29274 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29282 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29287 \begin_inset space \space{}
29290 numerical citation (as
29291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29298 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29306 ) or author-year citations (as
29307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29316 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29321 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29324 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29325 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29329 \begin_inset Index idx
29332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29333 Document ! Settings
29338 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29344 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29345 labels, is there to use
29348 \begin_inset space ~
29359 \begin_inset space ~
29364 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29367 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29375 With a bibliography database (see
29376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29378 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29385 ) one has in contrary to the
29389 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29390 These style formats are available:
29393 \begin_layout Description
29395 \begin_inset space ~
29398 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29399 -based approached without any additional packages
29400 (simple numeric citations).
29403 \begin_layout Description
29404 Biblatex loads the package
29409 \begin_inset Index idx
29412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29414 packages ! biblatex
29419 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29421 Biblatex citation style
29425 Biblatex bibliography style
29428 Options to the package
29432 can be entered in the
29439 \begin_layout Description
29441 \begin_inset space ~
29445 \begin_inset space ~
29448 mode) loads the package
29452 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29453 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29465 behavior very closely.
29470 this option has some additional styles.
29475 styles are also supported by this variant.
29478 \begin_layout Description
29480 \begin_inset space ~
29483 (BibTeX) loads the package
29488 \begin_inset Index idx
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29501 \begin_layout Description
29503 \begin_inset space ~
29506 (BibTeX) loads the package
29511 \begin_inset Index idx
29514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29521 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29533 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29535 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29544 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29546 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29547 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29549 Biblatex citation style
29552 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29558 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29562 \begin_layout Standard
29563 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29564 are available in the
29569 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29570 a name prefix such as
29571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29591 \begin_inset space \space{}
29595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29606 \begin_layout Standard
29607 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29613 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29628 Here is a simple example where the text
29629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29633 \begin_inset space ~
29637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29640 appears after the reference:
29643 \begin_layout Quote
29645 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29648 key "latexcompanion"
29656 \begin_layout Standard
29657 All styles except for
29661 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29671 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29676 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29677 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29678 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29683 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29684 multi-citation (so-called
29685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29688 qualified citation lists
29689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29695 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29700 dialog will display three columns in the field
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29715 \begin_inset space ~
29723 \begin_inset space ~
29729 If you double-click on an item's
29732 \begin_inset space ~
29740 \begin_inset space ~
29745 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29748 General text before
29754 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29757 \begin_layout Section
29759 \begin_inset Index idx
29762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29779 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 \begin_inset space ~
29788 or the toolbar button
29795 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29796 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29797 by \SpecialChar LyX
29798 as the index entry.
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29805 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29807 \begin_inset space ~
29813 A light blue box labeled
29814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29826 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29830 \begin_layout Standard
29831 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29832 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29833 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29834 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29838 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29846 \begin_layout Subsection
29847 Grouping Index Entries
29848 \begin_inset Index idx
29851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29861 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29863 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29864 lists under the entry
29865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29873 First we create the entry
29874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29882 \begin_inset space ~
29886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29888 reference "subsec:Lists"
29893 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29894 \begin_inset space ~
29898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29900 reference "sec:Itemize"
29904 , we insert the command
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29913 \begin_layout Standard
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 for the enumerated list in section
29925 \begin_inset space ~
29929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29931 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 The exclamation mark
29940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29947 marks the grouping levels.
29948 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29949 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29950 If we don't have an index entry for
29951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29958 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29961 \begin_layout Subsection
29963 \begin_inset Index idx
29966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 Index ! Page ranges
29975 \begin_layout Standard
29976 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29978 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29979 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29980 an index entry in section
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29987 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29997 Paragraph environments|(
30000 \begin_layout Standard
30001 and another entry at the end of section
30002 \begin_inset space ~
30006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30008 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30018 Paragraph environments|)
30021 \begin_layout Standard
30023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30046 respectively start and end the index range.
30047 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30048 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30049 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30050 An example is the index entry
30051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30054 Document ! Settings
30055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30061 \begin_layout Subsection
30063 \begin_inset Index idx
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30067 Index ! Cross referencing
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30076 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30077 We referred for example in the index entry
30078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30092 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30096 ) to the index entry
30097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30104 in the same section using the entry
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30110 GIF|see{Image formats}
30113 \begin_layout Standard
30114 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30116 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30117 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30120 \begin_layout Subsection
30122 \begin_inset Index idx
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30126 Index ! Entry order
30134 \begin_layout Standard
30135 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30136 follow the rules for the index order.
30137 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30143 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30151 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30160 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30161 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30186 \begin_inset Index idx
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 Dummy entries ! maïs
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 Dummy entries ! maître
30206 \begin_inset Index idx
30209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30210 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30215 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30216 maïs, maison, maître.
30217 To achieve this, we use the command
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30223 previous entry@current entry
30226 \begin_layout Standard
30227 In our case we want to have
30228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30243 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30246 \begin_layout Standard
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30254 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30256 See the next subsection for an example.
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30260 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30266 \begin_layout Standard
30267 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30272 to generate the index (see section
30273 \begin_inset space ~
30277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30279 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30288 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30289 -package aeguill in section
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30296 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30300 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30301 -packages although all these index
30302 commands start with
30303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30316 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30321 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30348 \begin_layout Subsection
30350 \begin_inset Index idx
30353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30354 Index ! Entry layout
30362 \begin_layout Standard
30363 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30370 This is an italic dummy entry
30375 You can also format the page number using the character
30376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30383 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30384 -command without a backslash.
30385 We can write for example
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30391 italic page number:|textit
30394 \begin_layout Standard
30395 to get the page number in italic.
30396 \begin_inset Index idx
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30405 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30406 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30424 \begin_inset space ~
30430 Have a look at section
30431 \begin_inset space ~
30435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30437 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30441 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30454 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30458 to generate the index, see section
30459 \begin_inset space ~
30463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30465 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30474 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30479 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30483 key "latexcompanion"
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30499 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30500 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30501 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30502 If so, put the following in the preamble
30505 \begin_layout Standard
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30527 \begin_layout Standard
30528 in the index entry.
30529 \begin_inset Index idx
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30533 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30538 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30539 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30540 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30544 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30545 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30546 a bold font for all index entries.
30547 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30559 documentation for details,
30560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30562 key "makeindex,xindy"
30570 \begin_layout Subsection
30572 \begin_inset Index idx
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30584 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30591 \begin_layout Standard
30592 If the index generation program
30596 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30597 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30601 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30602 distribution, is used.
30606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30612 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30613 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30614 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30615 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30625 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30627 dialog, see section
30628 \begin_inset space ~
30632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30634 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30639 The available options are listed and explained in
30640 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30642 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30648 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30654 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30658 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30662 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30663 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30666 \begin_layout Subsection
30670 \begin_layout Standard
30671 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30672 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30680 next to the standard index.
30682 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30683 that add this feature.
30690 \begin_inset Index idx
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30695 packages ! splitidx
30700 package to generate multiple indexes.
30701 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30707 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30709 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30717 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30718 style, but it also includes
30719 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30720 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30728 \begin_layout Standard
30729 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30730 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30736 and select the option
30738 Use multiple Indexes
30745 already contains the standard index
30746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30754 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30755 also appear as a heading) to the
30759 input field and press the
30764 The new index now also appears in the list.
30765 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30766 label color to the new index.
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30780 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30781 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30782 are additional features:
30785 \begin_layout Itemize
30786 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30787 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30790 \begin_layout Itemize
30791 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30792 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30800 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30801 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30802 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30803 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30806 \begin_layout Section
30807 Nomenclature/Glossary
30808 \begin_inset Index idx
30811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 \begin_inset Index idx
30821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30852 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30860 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30861 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30862 called nomenclature or glossary.
30865 \begin_layout Standard
30866 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30873 \begin_inset Index idx
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30893 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30897 \begin_layout Standard
30898 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30899 and then use the menu
30901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30912 or the toolbar button
30915 arg "nomencl-insert"
30920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30931 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30934 \begin_layout Standard
30935 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30936 The first is the term or
30940 that you wish to define.
30945 of the term or symbol.
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30958 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30966 \begin_layout Subsection
30967 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30968 \begin_inset Index idx
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 Nomenclature ! Layout
30980 \begin_layout Standard
30981 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30985 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30992 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31000 \begin_inset Newline newline
31008 \begin_inset Newline newline
31014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31021 character starts/ends the formula.
31022 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31023 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31035 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31047 -syntax is given in section
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31054 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31061 \begin_layout Standard
31065 \begin_inset space ~
31070 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31072 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31077 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31084 in this document is:
31085 \begin_inset Newline newline
31090 dummy entry for the character
31095 \begin_inset Newline newline
31107 \begin_inset space ~
31117 font use the command
31146 \begin_layout Standard
31147 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31152 \begin_inset space \space{}
31156 \begin_inset Newline newline
31172 \begin_inset Newline newline
31175 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31176 This command will make the font of all symbols
31183 \begin_inset space ~
31191 \begin_layout Standard
31192 If the characters |
31193 \begin_inset space \space{}
31197 \begin_inset space \space{}
31201 \begin_inset space \space{}
31205 \begin_inset space \space{}
31209 \begin_inset space \space{}
31212 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31213 a quote character in front of them.
31214 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31215 LatexCommand nomenclature
31216 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31217 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31225 \begin_layout Subsection
31226 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31227 \begin_inset Index idx
31230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31240 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31241 -code of the symbol
31243 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31245 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31249 LatexCommand nomenclature
31251 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31259 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31263 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31264 LatexCommand nomenclature
31267 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31273 They will be sorted by
31274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31300 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31303 will be sorted before the
31307 since the character
31308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31315 is considered in sorting.
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31322 \begin_inset space ~
31327 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31328 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31330 For the example given, you can insert
31334 in this field for the
31335 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31342 will be located before
31343 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31349 \begin_layout Standard
31350 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31365 \begin_layout Subsection
31366 Nomenclature Options
31367 \begin_inset Index idx
31370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31371 Nomenclature ! Options
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31384 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31385 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31388 \begin_layout Description
31389 refeq Appends the phrase
31390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31405 to every nomenclature entry, where
31411 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31414 \begin_layout Description
31415 refpage Appends the phrase
31416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31431 to every nomenclature entry, where
31437 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31440 \begin_layout Description
31441 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31444 \begin_layout Standard
31445 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31446 class options list in the
31448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31452 In this document the options
31459 \begin_layout Standard
31460 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31468 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31473 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31476 \begin_layout Description
31486 \begin_layout Description
31489 nomrefpage Like the
31496 \begin_layout Description
31499 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31508 \begin_layout Description
31512 \begin_inset space ~
31518 \begin_inset space ~
31523 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31526 \begin_layout Standard
31528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31535 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31536 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31540 \begin_layout Standard
31548 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31551 \begin_inset Newline newline
31558 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31563 \begin_inset Newline newline
31567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31582 by their translation.
31585 \begin_layout Subsection
31586 Printing the Nomenclature
31587 \begin_inset Index idx
31590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31591 Nomenclature ! Printing
31599 \begin_layout Standard
31600 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31603 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31619 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31620 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31621 You can choose between these settings:
31624 \begin_layout Description
31625 Default a space of 1
31626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31632 \begin_layout Description
31634 \begin_inset space ~
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31641 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31644 \begin_layout Description
31645 Custom custom space
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31649 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31658 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31666 For example, in order to change the name to
31670 , add the following line to the preamble:
31673 \begin_layout Standard
31681 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31684 \begin_layout Subsection
31685 Nomenclature Program
31686 \begin_inset Index idx
31689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31690 Nomenclature ! Program
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31698 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31711 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31712 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31714 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31719 by adding options, see section
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31726 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31731 The available options are listed and explained in
31732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31734 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31742 \begin_layout Section
31744 \begin_inset Index idx
31747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31754 \begin_inset Index idx
31757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31758 Document ! Branches
31764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31766 name "sec:Branches"
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31774 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31775 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31776 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31777 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31780 \begin_layout Standard
31781 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31782 allows you to put text into branches.
31783 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31784 To create a branch, either select the menu
31786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31787 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31790 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31799 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31800 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31801 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31802 and whether the name of the branch should
31803 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31804 (see below for an example).
31805 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31806 to the name of the other) and to add
31807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31819 \begin_inset space ~
31822 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31823 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31827 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31828 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 where you can choose a branch.
31834 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31838 \begin_layout Standard
31839 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31840 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31844 \begin_inset Branch Question
31848 \begin_layout Standard
31853 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31861 \begin_layout Standard
31862 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31871 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31879 \begin_layout Standard
31886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31887 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31890 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31891 Consider for example a file
31892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31899 which has the above branches.
31901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31908 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31932 branch were inactive,
31933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31948 branch was active, likewise
31949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31964 branch was active, and
31965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31972 if both branches were active.
31973 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31974 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31980 \begin_layout Standard
31981 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31987 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31988 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31992 \begin_inset space ~
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32005 \begin_layout Standard
32011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32018 branch is deactivated.
32024 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32032 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32033 definitions for each branch.
32034 For example you can define for the question branch
32038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32039 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32040 -syntax, see section
32041 \begin_inset space ~
32045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32047 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32069 \begin_layout Standard
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 and for the answer branch
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32093 \begin_layout Standard
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32104 \begin_inset Branch Question
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32178 Now it is possible to use the
32182 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32189 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32192 commands to obtain conditional output.
32193 Here is an example formula where only the
32200 \begin_inset Formula
32202 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32211 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32219 \begin_layout Standard
32220 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32226 \begin_inset space \space{}
32229 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32231 For this advanced usage, see the
32237 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32242 \begin_layout Section
32244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32246 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32251 \begin_inset Index idx
32254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32270 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32272 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32278 \begin_inset Index idx
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32283 packages ! hyperref
32288 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32289 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32290 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32291 part of the document.
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 The header information in the dialog tab
32300 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32301 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32302 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32303 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32307 \begin_inset space ~
32311 \begin_inset space ~
32316 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32317 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32318 and author entries.
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32326 \begin_inset space ~
32330 \begin_inset space ~
32335 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32338 \begin_layout Standard
32339 You can specify in the dialog tab
32343 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32352 \begin_inset space ~
32356 \begin_inset space ~
32361 option allows long links to be split;
32364 \begin_inset space ~
32368 \begin_inset space ~
32372 \begin_inset space ~
32380 \begin_inset space ~
32385 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32388 \begin_inset space ~
32393 colors the different links.
32394 The default colors are:
32397 \begin_layout Labeling
32398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32403 for hyperlinks and URLs
32406 \begin_layout Labeling
32407 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32415 \begin_layout Labeling
32416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32424 \begin_layout Standard
32425 but you can change these in the field
32430 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32433 \begin_layout Standard
32436 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32439 \begin_layout Standard
32444 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32445 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32446 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32449 \begin_layout Standard
32454 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32455 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32456 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32466 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32467 when opening the PDF.
32469 \begin_inset space ~
32472 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32473 \begin_inset space ~
32476 1 will only display the sections.
32479 \begin_layout Standard
32480 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32481 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32487 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32488 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32498 \begin_layout Section
32500 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32504 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32511 \begin_layout Subsection
32514 \begin_inset Index idx
32517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32527 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 As \SpecialChar LyX
32536 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32537 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32538 commands and constructs,
32541 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32542 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32543 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32544 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32545 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32546 cannot support all packages and
32550 \begin_layout Standard
32551 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32552 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32553 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32557 Code box is created by the menu
32559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32561 \begin_inset space ~
32566 or by the toolbar button
32579 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32588 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32590 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32592 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32597 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32602 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32609 , you can write the command part
32615 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32616 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32620 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32621 Code box behind the word.
32622 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32623 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32627 \begin_layout Standard
32628 \begin_inset Graphics
32629 filename clipart/ERT.png
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32641 \begin_layout Standard
32642 This is a line with a
32646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32678 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32679 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32680 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32681 know that the command is finished.
32689 \begin_layout Subsection
32690 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32692 \begin_inset Argument 1
32695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32696 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32703 \begin_inset Index idx
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32716 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32725 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32727 uses in the background.
32728 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32729 is based on commands, you can
32730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32738 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32739 any time if you know the right commands.
32740 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32741 is the end of the day.
32742 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32743 all caption labels bold.
32744 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32746 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32750 \begin_layout Standard
32751 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32755 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32758 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32769 As result you find that the package
32774 \begin_inset Index idx
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32785 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32790 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32794 \begin_inset space ~
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32807 usepackage[options]{package name}
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32811 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32812 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32813 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32814 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32818 In your case the package name is
32823 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32828 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32829 So you add the command
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32837 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32846 For more commands provided by the
32850 package, have a look at its documentation,
32851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32869 For example if you use a
32873 class, you don't need the package
32877 , you can instead write
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32885 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32892 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32893 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32900 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32904 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32905 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32907 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32908 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32909 Code box as described in the previous
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32914 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32915 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32918 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32920 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32928 \begin_layout Standard
32929 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32935 \begin_layout Standard
32939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32949 \begin_inset Note Note
32952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32961 \begin_layout Left Header
32962 \begin_inset Argument 1
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32985 \begin_inset Note Note
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32989 defines the header line as described below
32997 \begin_layout Center Header
32998 \begin_inset Argument 1
33001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 \begin_layout Right Header
33011 \begin_inset Argument 1
33014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 \begin_layout Left Footer
33036 \begin_inset Argument 1
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33060 \begin_layout Center Footer
33061 \begin_inset Argument 1
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 \begin_inset Newline newline
33080 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33086 \begin_layout Right Footer
33087 \begin_inset Argument 1
33090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33112 \begin_layout Section
33113 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33116 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33121 \begin_inset Index idx
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33125 Document ! Header/Footer line
33131 \begin_inset Index idx
33134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33143 \begin_layout Standard
33144 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33165 \begin_inset space ~
33171 As a second step add in the menu
33173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33183 Custom Header/Footerlines
33186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33190 This module offers the following 6
33191 \begin_inset space ~
33197 \begin_layout Description
33199 \begin_inset space ~
33203 \begin_inset space ~
33207 \begin_inset space ~
33211 \begin_inset space ~
33215 \begin_inset space ~
33221 \begin_layout Description
33223 \begin_inset space ~
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33247 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33250 \begin_layout Standard
33251 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33252 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33254 \begin_inset space ~
33258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33260 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33264 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33268 \begin_inset Float figure
33274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 \begin_inset Tabular
33278 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33279 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33280 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33282 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33302 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33346 The normal text on the page goes here.
33347 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33349 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33350 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33355 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33364 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33393 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33422 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33440 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33445 name "fig:Page-layout"
33449 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33471 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33475 \begin_inset space ~
33480 is set to “Default”.
33481 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33490 \begin_layout Subsection
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33496 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33497 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33498 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33500 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33502 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33506 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33507 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33521 \begin_layout Description
33524 thepage prints the current page number
33527 \begin_layout Description
33530 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33533 \begin_layout Description
33536 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33539 \begin_layout Description
33542 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33543 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33550 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33553 because it usually goes in a left header.
33556 \begin_layout Description
33559 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33560 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33562 It is normally used in the right header.
33565 \begin_layout Subsection
33566 Default header/footer
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33571 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33572 footer has the page number.
33573 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33574 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33575 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33578 \begin_inset space ~
33586 \begin_layout Subsection
33590 \begin_layout Standard
33591 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33592 Some pages are different.
33593 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33594 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33595 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33596 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33597 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33601 Header and footer decoration line
33604 \begin_layout Standard
33605 By default, you get a 0.4
33606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33609 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33610 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33622 in the following way:
33625 \begin_layout Standard
33632 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33649 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33659 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33675 Several header/footer lines
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33680 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33681 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33683 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33699 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33701 \begin_inset space ~
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33716 headheight}{height}
33719 \begin_layout Standard
33724 is a size in standard units (e.
33725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33729 \begin_inset space \space{}
33737 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33738 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33739 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33740 logfile with the menu
33742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33757 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33762 \begin_inset Index idx
33765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 packages ! fancyhdr
33773 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33774 for your header/footer.
33777 \begin_layout Subsection
33781 \begin_layout Standard
33782 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33783 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33784 This example consists of the following definition:
33787 \begin_layout Description
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33798 , empty optional argument
33801 \begin_layout Description
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33806 Header empty, empty optional argument
33809 \begin_layout Description
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33820 in the optional argument
33823 \begin_layout Description
33825 \begin_inset space ~
33834 in the optional argument
33837 \begin_layout Description
33839 \begin_inset space ~
33852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33856 \begin_inset Newline newline
33860 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33867 in the optional argument
33870 \begin_layout Description
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33881 , empty optional argument
33884 \begin_layout Description
33887 headrulewidth set to 2
33888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33896 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33919 \begin_layout Standard
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 pagestyle{headings}
33933 \begin_inset Note Note
33936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33937 switches back to page style with the default headings
33945 \begin_layout Section
33946 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33949 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33954 \begin_inset Index idx
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33964 \begin_inset Index idx
33967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33978 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33979 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33980 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33983 \begin_layout Subsection
33987 \begin_layout Standard
33988 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33994 \begin_inset Index idx
33997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 packages ! preview-latex
34004 (on some systems named simply
34009 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34018 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34020 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34028 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34029 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34030 -package are automatically
34031 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34035 \begin_layout Subsection
34039 \begin_layout Standard
34040 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34041 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34043 activate the option
34046 \begin_inset space ~
34053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34059 \begin_inset space ~
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34066 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34086 \begin_inset space ~
34091 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34095 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34117 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34118 and when you finish
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34131 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34132 generated by activating the option
34135 \begin_inset space ~
34141 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34149 \begin_layout Subsection
34150 Selected document parts
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34154 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34155 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34156 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34157 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34159 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34165 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34166 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34167 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34170 \begin_layout Standard
34171 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34178 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 is explained in section
34192 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34197 \begin_inset space ~
34207 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34208 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34209 the final rotated boxes,
34210 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34211 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34213 Here is the result:
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 \begin_inset Preview
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34228 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34234 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34244 height_special "totalheight"
34249 backgroundcolor "none"
34252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34277 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34283 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 Previewing works also for colors.
34307 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34326 is explained in section
34333 \begin_inset space ~
34346 \begin_layout Standard
34347 \begin_inset Preview
34349 \begin_layout Standard
34353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34377 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34403 \begin_layout Standard
34404 If \SpecialChar LyX
34405 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34406 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34407 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34408 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34409 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34410 the \SpecialChar TeX
34412 If \SpecialChar LyX
34413 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34414 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34416 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34417 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34418 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34421 \begin_layout Subsection
34426 \begin_layout Standard
34427 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34428 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34431 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34438 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34440 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34442 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34443 's main window, then only this selection
34444 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34445 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34446 the source view window.
34451 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34452 ; but note that if you have
34453 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34455 not just the one which is open at the time.
34458 \begin_layout Section
34459 Advanced Find and Replace
34460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34462 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34467 \begin_inset Index idx
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34477 \begin_inset Index idx
34480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34489 \begin_layout Subsection
34493 \begin_layout Standard
34494 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34495 allows for searching of complex,
34496 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34498 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34499 The key-features are:
34502 \begin_layout Itemize
34503 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34504 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34505 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34509 \begin_layout Itemize
34510 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34511 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34512 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34513 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34516 \begin_layout Itemize
34517 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34518 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34519 outside of mathematics environments
34522 \begin_layout Itemize
34523 Search may be widened to a specific
34528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34532 \begin_inset space ~
34535 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34536 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34543 \begin_layout Itemize
34544 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34545 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34553 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34556 \begin_layout Subsection
34560 \begin_layout Standard
34561 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34563 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34576 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34579 ) or the toolbar button
34582 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34588 Advanced Find and Replace
34593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34597 \begin_layout Standard
34603 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34607 \begin_inset space ~
34612 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34615 arg "paragraph-break"
34619 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34620 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34624 arg "paragraph-break"
34627 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34631 searches backwards.
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34643 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34657 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34661 Searching for mathematics
34664 \begin_layout Standard
34665 Mathematical formulas, such as
34666 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34669 or something more complex like
34670 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34673 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34678 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34679 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34680 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34681 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34691 \begin_layout Standard
34692 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34693 This is done by switching to the
34697 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34702 This way, entering in the
34709 \begin_layout Itemize
34710 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34711 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34714 \begin_layout Itemize
34715 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34716 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34719 \begin_layout Itemize
34720 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34721 of it only within section headings.
34722 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34723 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34727 \begin_layout Itemize
34728 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34729 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34737 The entries made in the
34741 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34744 \begin_inset space ~
34750 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34754 button or alternatively press
34757 arg "paragraph-break"
34764 while the cursor is in the
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34778 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34782 \begin_layout Itemize
34783 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34784 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34792 with its typewriter version
34793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34807 \begin_layout Itemize
34808 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34814 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34826 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34833 (you may want to enable the
34836 \begin_inset space ~
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34849 options and disable the
34857 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34865 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34866 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34870 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34873 , or occurrences of
34874 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34878 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34884 \begin_layout Subsection
34888 \begin_layout Standard
34889 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34894 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34896 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34898 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34908 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34914 This is done with the context menu
34916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34917 Insert Regular Expression
34919 while the cursor is in the
34924 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34925 expression matching rules
34929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34930 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34937 \begin_inset space ~
34940 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34941 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34947 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34948 same text in the document.
34949 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34950 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34953 \begin_layout Enumerate
34954 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34959 editor the fraction
34960 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34964 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34967 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34968 fractions with the given denominator.
34971 \begin_layout Enumerate
34972 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34984 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34989 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34990 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34991 Also, by inserting a
34992 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34995 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34996 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35000 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35001 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35002 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35005 , and referring back to them through
35006 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35010 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35014 For example, try searching with the regexp
35015 \begin_inset Newline newline
35018 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35021 \begin_inset Newline newline
35024 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35028 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35031 \begin_layout Standard
35032 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35040 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35041 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35042 sub-expressions is absolute.
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35051 always refers to the first occurrence of
35052 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35055 in all entered regexps.
35063 \begin_layout Section
35065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35067 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35072 \begin_inset Index idx
35075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35084 \begin_layout Standard
35086 has a built-in spell checker.
35089 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35096 key or the toolbar button
35099 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35102 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35103 beginning of the currently selected text.
35104 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35105 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35106 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35107 scrolled so that it is visible.
35108 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35109 n, if any could be found.
35110 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35114 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35115 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35119 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35126 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35127 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35129 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35130 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35141 arg "dialog-show character"
35144 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35146 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35150 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35151 can be downloaded from here:
35152 \begin_inset Newline newline
35156 \begin_inset Flex URL
35159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35161 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35167 \begin_inset Newline newline
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35174 files for each language.
35175 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35179 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35180 's installation subfolder
35188 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35190 \begin_inset Newline newline
35193 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35194 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35195 but in most cases these are
35211 is the language code.
35214 \begin_layout Subsection
35218 \begin_layout Standard
35221 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35222 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35227 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35230 you can set the following things:
35233 \begin_layout Description
35235 \begin_inset space ~
35238 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35239 should use for spell checking.
35240 Depending on your platform,
35254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35256 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35271 \begin_inset space ~
35274 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35277 \begin_layout Description
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35282 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35283 will always use the given language
35284 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35287 \begin_layout Description
35289 \begin_inset space ~
35292 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35298 \begin_inset space \space{}
35302 This should normally not be needed.
35305 \begin_layout Description
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35311 \begin_inset space ~
35314 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35326 \begin_layout Description
35328 \begin_inset space ~
35331 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35332 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35333 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35334 appear in a context menu.
35335 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35339 \begin_layout Description
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35352 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35356 \begin_layout Section
35358 \begin_inset Index idx
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35370 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35377 \begin_layout Standard
35379 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35380 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35392 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35402 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35404 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35405 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35406 which are available for many languages.
35409 \begin_layout Standard
35410 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35411 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35415 \begin_layout Subsection
35416 Setting up the thesaurus
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35428 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35432 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35437 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35443 \begin_inset space ~
35451 For instance, the US English files are named:
35454 \begin_layout Itemize
35458 \begin_layout Itemize
35462 \begin_layout Standard
35471 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35472 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35477 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35484 ) to the path where they are installed.
35488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35489 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35490 ies, typical locations are
35496 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35500 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35504 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35507 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35513 LibreOffice-<Version>
35520 On the Mac, the default location is
35522 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35523 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35524 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35525 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35526 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35527 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35535 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35536 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35537 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35543 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35547 \begin_layout Itemize
35548 \begin_inset Flex URL
35551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35553 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35562 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35563 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35567 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35574 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35576 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35577 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35584 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35587 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35593 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35596 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35597 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35607 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35614 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35617 \begin_layout Subsection
35618 Using the thesaurus
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35627 or the toolbar button
35630 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35633 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35635 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35637 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35638 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35639 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35648 ), related terms (such as
35651 \begin_inset space ~
35660 ), compounds (such as
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35672 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35681 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35686 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35691 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35692 the dictionary, such as the above
35696 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35701 \begin_inset space \space{}
35704 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35705 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35706 For example, looking up the word form
35710 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35715 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35720 \begin_inset space \space{}
35731 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35732 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35733 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35736 \begin_layout Section
35738 \begin_inset Index idx
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 \begin_inset Index idx
35751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35752 Document ! Change Tracking
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35760 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35769 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35770 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35771 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35778 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35780 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_layout Standard
35789 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35803 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35804 You can change the color in
35806 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35807 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35813 \begin_inset space ~
35818 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35824 \begin_inset Index idx
35827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35828 Color ! Change tracking
35833 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35834 's status bar when the
35835 cursor is in changed text.
35836 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35839 arg "changes-merge"
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35846 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35848 \begin_inset Index idx
35851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 \begin_inset Graphics
35869 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35877 \begin_layout Standard
35878 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35884 \begin_layout Standard
35885 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 \begin_inset Tabular
35897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35898 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35899 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35900 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35910 arg "changes-track"
35918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35929 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35949 arg "changes-output"
35957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35968 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 Jumps to the next change
36014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36023 arg "change-accept"
36031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36039 \begin_inset space ~
36042 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36062 arg "change-reject"
36070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36081 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36101 arg "changes-merge"
36109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36120 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36140 arg "all-changes-accept"
36148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36159 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36183 arg "all-changes-reject"
36191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36202 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36204 \begin_inset space ~
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36241 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36243 \begin_inset space ~
36252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36277 \begin_inset space ~
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36294 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36321 \begin_layout Standard
36322 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36323 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36324 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36325 the next change after the current cursor position.
36326 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36327 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36328 step to the next change.
36329 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36334 to describe a change.
36337 \begin_layout Standard
36338 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36344 \begin_inset Index idx
36347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36355 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36364 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36368 \begin_layout Section
36369 Comparison of Documents
36370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36372 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36377 \begin_inset Index idx
36380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36381 Comparison of documents
36389 \begin_layout Standard
36390 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36397 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36398 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36400 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36402 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36427 \begin_inset space ~
36431 \begin_inset space ~
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36448 enables the change tracking option
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36464 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36467 \begin_layout Section
36468 International Support
36469 \begin_inset Index idx
36472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36473 International support
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36482 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36483 with any language you want.
36484 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36485 up \SpecialChar LyX
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36489 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36497 \begin_layout Standard
36498 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36499 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36506 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36513 \begin_layout Subsection
36515 \begin_inset Index idx
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36525 \begin_inset Index idx
36528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 Document ! Settings
36535 \begin_inset Index idx
36538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36539 Document ! Language
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36551 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36554 dialog lets you set
36556 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36561 \begin_layout Standard
36566 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36571 \begin_inset space ~
36576 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36577 For details about the different encoding options see section
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36584 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36591 \begin_layout Subsection
36592 Keyboard mapping configuration
36593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36595 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36603 If you have for example a U.
36604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36607 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36608 can use an alternate keymap.
36609 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36614 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36615 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36616 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36619 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36620 \begin_inset space ~
36624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36626 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36631 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36632 which one you want to use.
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36636 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36637 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36638 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36642 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36643 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36644 one to support the characters you want.
36645 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36652 \begin_layout Chapter
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36657 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36666 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36667 topic inside the user's guide.
36670 \begin_layout Section
36672 \begin_inset Index idx
36675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36684 \begin_layout Standard
36689 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 Creates a new document.
36700 \begin_layout Subsection
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36706 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36707 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36710 \begin_layout Subsection
36714 \begin_layout Standard
36718 \begin_layout Subsection
36722 \begin_layout Standard
36723 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36724 Click there on a file to open it.
36727 \begin_layout Subsection
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36732 Closes the current document.
36735 \begin_layout Subsection
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36740 Closes all opened documents.
36743 \begin_layout Subsection
36747 \begin_layout Standard
36748 Saves the actual document.
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36759 \begin_layout Subsection
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 Saves all opened documents.
36767 \begin_layout Subsection
36771 \begin_layout Standard
36772 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36781 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36782 It is described in the section
36784 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36789 Additional Features
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36800 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36802 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36803 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 When using the menu entry
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36816 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36820 \begin_inset space ~
36824 \begin_inset space ~
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36833 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36834 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36837 \begin_layout Subsection
36839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36841 name "subsec:Export"
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 You can export your document to various file formats.
36850 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36852 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36853 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36854 during its configuration.
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36866 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36873 \begin_layout Description
36879 \begin_inset space ~
36882 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36887 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36888 \begin_inset Newline newline
36891 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36892 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36896 \begin_layout Description
36897 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36903 \begin_layout Description
36905 \begin_inset space ~
36908 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36914 \begin_layout Description
36915 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36916 's native DVI-format.
36917 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36918 files paths or file names in your document.
36920 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36927 \begin_layout Description
36928 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36929 in files paths or file names
36932 \begin_layout Description
36934 \begin_inset space ~
36941 ) DVI-format using the program
36943 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36946 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36958 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36966 \begin_layout Description
36968 \begin_inset space ~
36971 (cropped) the same as
36975 but with cropped page margins.
36978 \begin_layout Description
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36983 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36987 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36992 \begin_layout Description
36996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37004 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37012 \begin_layout Description
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37021 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37025 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37033 \begin_layout Description
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37046 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37047 source that is compilable with the program
37049 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37053 \begin_layout Description
37057 \begin_inset space ~
37062 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37063 source, additionally all images used in the document
37064 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37068 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37071 \begin_layout Description
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37080 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37081 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37082 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37090 \begin_layout Description
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37103 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37104 source that is compilable with the program
37110 \begin_layout Description
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37123 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37124 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37130 \begin_layout Description
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37135 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37136 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37142 \begin_inset space \space{}
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37166 represent the version number)
37169 \begin_layout Description
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37178 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37179 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37180 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37184 \begin_layout Description
37185 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37186 's internal XHTML engine
37189 \begin_layout Description
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37206 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37211 For the conversion the program
37220 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37223 \begin_layout Description
37224 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37229 \begin_layout Description
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37234 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37236 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37239 For the conversion the program
37248 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37251 \begin_layout Description
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37256 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37257 For the conversion the program
37266 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37269 \begin_layout Description
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37274 (cropped) the same as
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37282 but with cropped page margins
37285 \begin_layout Description
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37294 PDF-format using the program
37298 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37301 \begin_layout Description
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37322 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37327 \begin_inset space \space{}
37330 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37334 \begin_layout Description
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37343 PDF-format using the program
37345 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37348 , produces PDF-files directly
37351 \begin_layout Description
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37360 PDF-format using the program
37364 , produces PDF-files directly
37367 \begin_layout Description
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37376 PDF-format using the program
37380 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37383 \begin_layout Description
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37392 PDF-format using the program
37397 , produces PDF-files directly
37400 \begin_layout Description
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_layout Description
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37425 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37426 and then exported as text using the program
37431 \begin_layout Description
37436 PostScript format using the program
37444 options see section
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37451 reference "subsec:General-output"
37458 \begin_layout Description
37459 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37460 source and also code in the statistical programming
37474 it is possible to use
37478 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37482 \begin_layout Standard
37483 If one of the menu entries
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37499 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37501 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37509 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37514 \begin_inset Index idx
37517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37527 \begin_layout Subsection
37531 \begin_layout Standard
37532 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37533 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37542 reference "sec:Paths"
37547 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37556 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37557 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37558 's preferences as described in section
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37565 reference "subsec:Converters"
37572 \begin_layout Subsection
37573 New and Close Window
37576 \begin_layout Standard
37577 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37581 \begin_layout Subsection
37585 \begin_layout Standard
37586 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37589 \begin_layout Section
37591 \begin_inset Index idx
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37603 \begin_layout Subsection
37607 \begin_layout Standard
37608 Described in section
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37615 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37622 \begin_layout Subsection
37623 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37626 \begin_layout Standard
37627 Described in section
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37634 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37641 \begin_layout Subsection
37645 \begin_layout Standard
37646 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37647 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37650 \begin_layout Subsection
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37655 Selects the whole document.
37658 \begin_layout Subsection
37659 Find & Replace (Quick)
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37663 Described in section
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37670 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37677 \begin_layout Subsection
37678 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37681 \begin_layout Standard
37682 Described in section
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37696 \begin_layout Subsection
37697 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37705 \begin_layout Subsection
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37710 Described in section
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37717 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37724 \begin_layout Subsection
37726 \begin_inset Index idx
37729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 Paragraph ! Settings
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37739 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37740 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37744 \begin_layout Standard
37745 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37746 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37752 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37763 \begin_layout Subsection
37764 Table and Rows & Columns
37767 \begin_layout Standard
37768 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37769 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37770 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37773 \begin_layout Subsection
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37779 It will dissolve this inset.
37780 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37784 \begin_layout Subsection
37788 \begin_layout Standard
37789 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37790 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37793 \begin_layout Subsection
37794 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37797 \begin_layout Standard
37798 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37800 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37807 reference "sec:Nesting"
37812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37814 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37821 \begin_layout Subsection
37824 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37829 nts of the same type.
37831 \begin_inset space ~
37835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37837 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37841 for an explanation.
37844 \begin_layout Section
37846 \begin_inset Index idx
37849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 \begin_layout Standard
37859 At the bottom of the
37863 menu the opened documents are listed.
37866 \begin_layout Subsection
37867 Open/Close all Insets
37870 \begin_layout Standard
37871 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37874 \begin_layout Subsection
37875 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 Math macros are described in the
37890 \begin_layout Subsection
37894 \begin_layout Standard
37895 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37896 \begin_inset space ~
37900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37902 reference "sec:Navigating"
37907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37909 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37916 \begin_layout Subsection
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37921 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37923 \begin_inset space ~
37927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37929 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37936 \begin_layout Subsection
37940 \begin_layout Standard
37941 Opens a window showing console messages.
37942 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37947 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37948 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37949 is processing the document.
37952 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37956 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37961 \begin_inset Index idx
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37975 All toolbars and the
37978 \begin_inset space ~
37983 can be turned on and off.
37988 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38017 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38021 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38028 \begin_layout Standard
38033 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38037 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38038 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38039 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38040 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38041 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38046 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38053 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38060 \begin_layout Subsection
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38072 \begin_inset space ~
38076 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38084 \begin_inset space ~
38088 \begin_inset space ~
38093 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38094 's main window vertically while
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38105 \begin_inset space ~
38109 \begin_inset space ~
38113 \begin_inset space ~
38117 \begin_inset space ~
38122 will split it horizontally.
38123 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38124 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38125 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38126 three or more documents at the same time.
38127 To close a split view, use the menu
38130 \begin_inset space ~
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38142 \begin_layout Subsection
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 Closes a split view.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38156 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38157 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38158 's main window fullscreen.
38159 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38160 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38163 \begin_layout Section
38165 \begin_inset Index idx
38168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38177 \begin_layout Subsection
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38183 \begin_inset space ~
38187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38189 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38200 \begin_layout Subsection
38202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38204 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38211 \begin_layout Standard
38212 Here you can insert the following characters:
38215 \begin_layout Description
38220 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38223 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38224 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38225 -packages you have installed.
38226 You can get a complete display by checking
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38235 \begin_inset Newline newline
38239 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 Not all characters will be visible in the
38251 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38252 dialog (see section
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38259 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38263 ) can display every character.
38271 \begin_layout Description
38272 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38276 \begin_layout Description
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38285 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38292 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38299 \begin_layout Description
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38304 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38308 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38314 \begin_layout Description
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38319 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38323 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38329 \begin_layout Description
38331 \begin_inset space ~
38334 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38338 \begin_layout Description
38340 \begin_inset space ~
38343 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38347 \begin_layout Description
38349 \begin_inset space ~
38352 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38358 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38364 \begin_layout Description
38366 \begin_inset space ~
38369 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38373 \begin_layout Description
38375 \begin_inset space ~
38379 \begin_inset Index idx
38382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 \begin_inset Index idx
38392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38393 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38398 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38399 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38401 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38407 \begin_inset Index idx
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 \begin_inset Newline newline
38421 More information about this feature can be found in the
38427 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38433 \begin_layout Description
38434 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38436 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38437 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38441 \begin_layout Subsection
38445 \begin_layout Standard
38446 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38449 \begin_layout Description
38450 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38451 \begin_inset script superscript
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38462 \begin_layout Description
38463 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38464 \begin_inset script subscript
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 \begin_layout Description
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38480 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38481 \begin_inset space ~
38485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38487 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38494 \begin_layout Description
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38499 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38506 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38513 \begin_layout Description
38515 \begin_inset space ~
38518 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38525 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38532 \begin_layout Description
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38537 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38543 \begin_inset space \space{}
38546 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38547 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38556 To insert a fraction use the command
38561 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38565 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38574 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38581 \begin_layout Description
38583 \begin_inset space ~
38586 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38593 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38600 \begin_layout Description
38602 \begin_inset space ~
38605 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38612 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38619 \begin_layout Description
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38624 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38631 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38638 \begin_layout Description
38639 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38640 \begin_inset space ~
38644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38646 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38653 \begin_layout Description
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38665 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38672 \begin_layout Description
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38677 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38684 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38691 \begin_layout Description
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38700 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38709 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38716 for a usage example.
38719 \begin_layout Description
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38728 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38735 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38742 \begin_layout Description
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38747 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38748 as described in section
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38755 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38762 \begin_layout Description
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38767 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38774 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38781 \begin_layout Description
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38786 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38787 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38789 \begin_inset space ~
38793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38795 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38802 \begin_layout Description
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38814 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38821 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38827 \begin_inset space ~
38830 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38831 \begin_inset space ~
38835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38837 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38844 \begin_layout Subsection
38848 \begin_layout Standard
38849 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38853 \begin_inset space ~
38874 are described in section
38875 \begin_inset space ~
38879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38881 reference "sec:toc"
38890 is described in section
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38897 reference "sec:Index"
38905 is described in section
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38912 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38918 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38921 is described in section
38922 \begin_inset space ~
38926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38928 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38935 \begin_layout Subsection
38939 \begin_layout Standard
38940 To insert floats, as described in section
38941 \begin_inset space ~
38945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38947 reference "sec:Floats"
38951 and in detail the chapter
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38966 \begin_layout Subsection
38970 \begin_layout Standard
38971 To insert notes, described in section
38972 \begin_inset space ~
38976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38978 reference "sec:Notes"
38985 \begin_layout Subsection
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38990 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38992 Branches are described in section
38993 \begin_inset space ~
38997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38999 reference "sec:Branches"
39006 \begin_layout Subsection
39010 \begin_layout Standard
39011 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39012 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39014 An example is the document class
39015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39022 with three custom insets.
39025 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39029 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39035 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39038 \begin_layout Subsection
39040 \begin_inset Index idx
39043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39052 \begin_layout Standard
39053 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39055 For more information see chapter
39057 External Document Parts
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39066 \begin_layout Subsection
39068 \begin_inset Index idx
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39081 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39082 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39097 \begin_layout Subsection
39101 \begin_layout Standard
39106 dialog as described in section
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39113 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39120 \begin_layout Subsection
39124 \begin_layout Standard
39129 as described in section
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39136 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39143 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 \begin_layout Standard
39152 as described in section
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39159 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39166 \begin_layout Subsection
39168 \begin_inset Index idx
39171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 \begin_inset Index idx
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39191 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39192 Floats are described in section
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39199 reference "sec:Floats"
39203 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39205 Multi-page Captions
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39218 \begin_layout Subsection
39222 \begin_layout Standard
39223 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39230 reference "sec:Index"
39237 \begin_layout Subsection
39241 \begin_layout Standard
39242 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39249 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39256 \begin_layout Subsection
39260 \begin_layout Standard
39261 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39262 Tables are described in section
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39269 reference "sec:Tables"
39273 and in detail in the chapter
39280 \begin_inset space ~
39288 \begin_layout Subsection
39292 \begin_layout Standard
39298 Graphics are described in section
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39305 reference "sec:Graphics"
39312 \begin_layout Subsection
39316 \begin_layout Standard
39317 Inserts a URL as described in section
39318 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39324 reference "subsec:URLs"
39331 \begin_layout Subsection
39335 \begin_layout Standard
39336 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39343 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39350 \begin_layout Subsection
39354 \begin_layout Standard
39355 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39356 \begin_inset space ~
39360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39362 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39369 \begin_layout Subsection
39373 \begin_layout Standard
39374 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39381 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39388 \begin_layout Subsection
39392 \begin_layout Standard
39393 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39394 title or caption of a float.
39395 Inserts a short title as described in section
39396 \begin_inset space ~
39400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39402 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39409 \begin_layout Subsection
39414 \begin_layout Standard
39415 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39416 Code box as described in section
39417 \begin_inset space ~
39421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39423 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39430 \begin_layout Subsection
39432 \begin_inset Index idx
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 Inserts a program listings box.
39446 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39448 Program Code Listings
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39461 \begin_layout Subsection
39465 \begin_layout Standard
39466 Inserts the actual date.
39467 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39472 \begin_layout Subsection
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39477 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39484 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39491 \begin_layout Section
39493 \begin_inset Index idx
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 \begin_layout Standard
39506 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39510 of the current document.
39511 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39514 \begin_layout Subsection
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39519 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39520 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39521 to jump, for example, between section
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39526 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39530 2.5 and use the submenu
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_inset space ~
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39560 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39564 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39570 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39573 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39576 \begin_layout Standard
39577 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39581 \begin_inset space ~
39586 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39589 \begin_inset space ~
39594 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39597 \begin_layout Subsection
39598 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39601 \begin_layout Standard
39602 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39606 \begin_layout Subsection
39610 \begin_layout Standard
39611 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39612 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39613 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39617 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_layout Subsection
39633 \begin_layout Standard
39634 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39637 The \SpecialChar LyX
39638 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39640 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset space ~
39653 manual for a detailed description.
39656 \begin_layout Section
39658 \begin_inset Index idx
39661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39670 \begin_layout Subsection
39674 \begin_layout Standard
39675 Change Tracking is described in section
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39682 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39689 \begin_layout Subsection
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39698 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39699 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39700 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39702 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39703 to the clipboard or update the view.
39704 \begin_inset Newline newline
39707 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39711 \begin_layout Standard
39714 Open Containing Directory
39716 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39717 's temporary folder for the document.
39718 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39719 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39720 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39721 For example some journals require to send the
39725 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39729 \begin_layout Subsection
39730 Start Appendix Here
39733 \begin_layout Standard
39734 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39735 as described in section
39736 \begin_inset space ~
39740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39742 reference "sec:Appendices"
39749 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_layout Standard
39758 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39759 default output format for the document (menu
39761 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39762 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39763 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39781 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39785 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39789 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39794 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39799 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39817 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39821 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39822 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39824 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39830 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39835 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39845 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39850 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39851 when it is first configured.
39852 The default output format is
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39863 \begin_layout Subsection
39864 View (Other Formats)
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39869 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39870 actual document with an external program.
39871 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39872 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39873 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39875 All possible formats are listed in section
39876 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39882 reference "subsec:Export"
39887 You should at least see the menu entry
39892 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39894 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39896 \begin_inset space ~
39900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39902 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39907 \begin_inset Index idx
39910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39911 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39922 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39924 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39925 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39930 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39935 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39945 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39950 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39951 when it is first configured.
39954 \begin_layout Subsection
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39963 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39964 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39967 \begin_layout Subsection
39968 Update (Other Formats)
39971 \begin_layout Standard
39972 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39973 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39976 \begin_layout Subsection
39977 View Master Document
39980 \begin_layout Standard
39981 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40002 manual for more information on this topic).
40003 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40004 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40017 generates the output of the whole book, while
40021 will just output the chapter alone.
40024 \begin_layout Standard
40025 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40026 in the document settings (menu
40028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40029 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40030 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40048 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40052 ) or in the preferences (menu
40054 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40055 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40060 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40065 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40083 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40090 \begin_layout Subsection
40091 Update Master Document
40094 \begin_layout Standard
40095 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40116 manual for more information on this topic).
40117 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40118 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40121 \begin_layout Standard
40122 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40123 in the document settings (menu
40125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40127 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40145 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40149 ) or in the preferences (menu
40151 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40152 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40157 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40162 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40180 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40187 \begin_layout Subsection
40189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40191 name "subsec:Compressed"
40198 \begin_layout Standard
40199 Un/compresses the current document.
40200 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40201 compression (see the
40203 Additional Features
40205 manual for details).
40208 \begin_layout Subsection
40212 \begin_layout Standard
40213 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40216 \begin_layout Subsection
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 The document settings are described in appendix
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40228 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40235 \begin_layout Section
40237 \begin_inset Index idx
40240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40249 \begin_layout Subsection
40253 \begin_layout Standard
40254 Spell checking is explained in section
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40261 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40268 \begin_layout Subsection
40272 \begin_layout Standard
40273 The thesaurus is described in section
40274 \begin_inset space ~
40278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40280 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40287 \begin_layout Subsection
40289 \begin_inset Index idx
40292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40299 \begin_inset Index idx
40302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40311 \begin_layout Standard
40312 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40313 the highlighted document part.
40316 \begin_layout Subsection
40322 \begin_inset Index idx
40325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40326 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40335 \begin_layout Standard
40336 Generates with the help of the program
40338 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40341 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40343 This feature is not available on Windows.
40346 \begin_layout Subsection
40352 \begin_inset Index idx
40355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40365 \begin_layout Standard
40366 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40376 to see the full filename paths.
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40381 \begin_inset Index idx
40384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40394 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40395 files as described in section
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40402 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40409 \begin_layout Subsection
40411 \begin_inset Index idx
40414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40427 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40445 \begin_inset Index idx
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40449 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40458 \begin_layout Standard
40459 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40460 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40461 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40462 -packages and programs it needs; see
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40470 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40477 \begin_layout Subsection
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40486 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40493 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40500 \begin_layout Section
40502 \begin_inset Index idx
40505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40516 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40518 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40522 \begin_layout Standard
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40531 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40532 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40533 packages and classes found
40534 by \SpecialChar LyX
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40542 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40558 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40563 \begin_layout Section
40565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40567 name "sec:Toolbars"
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40589 \begin_layout Standard
40590 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40591 This is described in the
40593 Additional Features
40598 \begin_layout Subsection
40600 \begin_inset Index idx
40603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40613 \begin_inset Graphics
40614 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40622 \begin_layout Standard
40623 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40629 \begin_layout Standard
40630 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40647 \begin_inset Note Note
40650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40651 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40656 manual for more information.
40664 \begin_layout Standard
40665 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40671 \begin_layout Standard
40672 \begin_inset Tabular
40673 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40674 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40675 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40676 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40682 \begin_inset Graphics
40683 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40697 pull-down box for the environments
40710 \begin_layout Standard
40711 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40717 \begin_layout Standard
40719 \begin_inset Tabular
40720 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40721 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40722 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40723 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40747 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40807 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40837 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40853 arg "spelling-continuously"
40861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40865 Spellcheck continuously
40871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41014 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41070 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41126 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41127 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 Emphasize text, function of the
41157 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41162 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41192 Set text to noun style, function of the
41194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41199 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 arg "textstyle-apply"
41225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 Format text using the current settings in the
41231 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41269 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 arg "tabular-insert"
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41359 Toggle outline window on/off,
41361 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41377 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41389 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41404 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41416 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41429 \begin_layout Subsection
41431 \begin_inset Index idx
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 \begin_layout Standard
41444 \begin_inset Graphics
41445 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41453 \begin_layout Standard
41454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41460 \begin_layout Standard
41461 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41465 \begin_layout Standard
41466 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41472 \begin_layout Standard
41473 \begin_inset Tabular
41474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41475 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41476 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41477 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41514 arg "layout Enumerate"
41522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41541 arg "layout Itemize"
41549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41595 arg "layout Description"
41603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41622 arg "depth-increment"
41630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 arg "depth-decrement"
41668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 arg "float-insert figure"
41706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41713 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41729 arg "float-insert table"
41737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41744 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41790 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41884 arg "nomencl-insert"
41892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 arg "footnote-insert"
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41997 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42142 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42157 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 arg "dialog-show character"
42185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42196 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42212 arg "layout-paragraph"
42220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42246 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42260 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42274 \begin_layout Subsection
42275 View/Update Toolbar
42276 \begin_inset Index idx
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 Toolbar ! View / Update
42288 \begin_layout Standard
42289 \begin_inset Graphics
42290 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42298 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42305 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42310 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42316 \begin_layout Standard
42317 \begin_inset Tabular
42318 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42319 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42320 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42321 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 arg "buffer-update"
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 arg "master-buffer-view"
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42407 \begin_inset space ~
42416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 arg "master-buffer-update"
42433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42463 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42478 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42479 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 Synchronize with Output
42486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42510 View (Other Formats)
42516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42523 arg "update-others"
42531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42538 Update (Other Formats)
42551 \begin_layout Standard
42552 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42556 \begin_layout Subsection
42560 \begin_layout Standard
42561 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42568 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42572 , the table toolbar
42573 \begin_inset Index idx
42576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42590 manual and the math macro toolbar
42591 \begin_inset Index idx
42594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42607 \begin_layout Chapter
42608 The Document Settings
42609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42611 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42616 \begin_inset Index idx
42619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 Document ! Settings
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42637 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42638 is called with the menu
42640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42644 You can save your document settings as default with the
42646 Save as Document Defaults
42648 button in any dialog.
42649 This will create a template named
42653 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42654 when you create a new document without
42658 \begin_layout Standard
42663 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42664 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42669 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42670 to find the one you are looking for.
42671 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42672 the submenus of the dialog.
42674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42678 \begin_inset space \space{}
42682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42689 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42690 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42691 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42694 \begin_layout Section
42698 \begin_layout Standard
42699 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42701 Document classes are described in section
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42708 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42720 \begin_inset space ~
42725 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42730 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42731 as a layout for a document class.
42732 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42734 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 Some classes use special class options by default.
42745 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42749 and you can decide to use them or not.
42750 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42751 recommended you leave them untouched.
42756 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42757 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42762 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42764 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42771 \begin_inset Newline newline
42776 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42779 \begin_inset Newline newline
42782 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42783 distribution, see section
42788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42790 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42808 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42809 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42810 in the background if the child document
42811 is opened without its master.
42812 This way child documents are always compilable.
42813 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42820 \begin_inset space ~
42828 \begin_layout Standard
42829 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42840 \begin_inset Index idx
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42845 packages ! prettyref
42851 \begin_inset Index idx
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42856 packages ! refstyle
42861 for cross-references, see section
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42868 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42875 \begin_layout Section
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42880 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42881 Please refer to the section
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42897 manual for details.
42900 \begin_layout Section
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 Modules are explained in section
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42912 reference "subsec:Modules"
42919 \begin_layout Section
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42931 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42938 \begin_layout Section
42942 \begin_layout Standard
42943 The document font settings are described in section
42944 \begin_inset space ~
42948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42950 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42957 \begin_layout Section
42961 \begin_layout Standard
42962 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42979 and whether it should be a
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42987 can also be specified here.
42990 \begin_layout Standard
42991 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42992 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42993 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42995 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42998 \begin_layout Standard
43001 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43004 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43005 justifies the text on screen.
43006 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43010 \begin_layout Section
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43015 This dialog is described in sections
43016 \begin_inset space ~
43020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43022 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43029 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43036 \begin_layout Section
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "subsec:Margins"
43055 \begin_layout Section
43057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43059 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43064 \begin_inset Index idx
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 Language ! Encoding
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43077 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43078 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43079 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43081 is always encoded in utf8).
43082 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43083 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43084 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43085 -command is not known for
43086 a particular character).
43089 \begin_layout Standard
43090 If you use the option
43095 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43096 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43097 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43099 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43100 exactly one encoding.
43101 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43106 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43107 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43108 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43109 installation supports Unicode), choose
43110 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43111 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43112 is quite incomplete, so
43113 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43118 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43119 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43120 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43121 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43122 -commands is not used, because all
43123 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43124 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43125 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43126 , two new alternative engines
43127 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43129 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43131 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43134 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43156 \begin_inset space ~
43160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43162 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43167 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43171 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43178 \begin_inset space ~
43183 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43184 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43194 The possible settings are:
43197 \begin_layout Description
43198 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43200 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43201 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43211 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43218 \begin_layout Description
43219 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43220 format you will use.
43221 In many cases this will be
43226 \begin_inset Index idx
43229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 If the newer package
43242 \begin_inset Index idx
43245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43247 packages ! polyglossia
43252 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43253 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43254 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43256 this package will be used instead of
43263 \begin_layout Description
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43276 would be more appropriate.
43279 \begin_layout Description
43280 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43281 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43285 (for German texts), type in
43288 \begin_inset Newline newline
43293 usepackage{ngerman}
43296 \begin_layout Description
43297 None will not use a language package.
43298 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43305 \begin_layout Description
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43311 \begin_inset space ~
43315 \begin_inset space ~
43322 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43328 \begin_inset Index idx
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43333 packages ! inputenc
43339 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43340 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43341 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43345 \begin_layout Description
43346 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43348 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43349 commands, which may result in a big
43350 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43351 -commands are needed.
43354 \begin_layout Description
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43363 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43366 \begin_layout Description
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_inset space ~
43375 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43378 \begin_layout Description
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43383 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43386 \begin_layout Description
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43392 \begin_inset space ~
43395 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43396 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43399 \begin_layout Description
43401 \begin_inset space ~
43405 \begin_inset space ~
43408 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43412 \begin_layout Description
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43421 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43422 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43425 \begin_layout Description
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43438 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43445 \begin_layout Description
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43458 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43459 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43462 \begin_layout Description
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43471 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43472 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43473 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43474 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_layout Description
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43494 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43495 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43496 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43498 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_layout Description
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43518 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43521 \begin_layout Description
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43530 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43533 \begin_layout Description
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43542 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43545 \begin_layout Description
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43550 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43553 \begin_layout Description
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43558 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43561 \begin_layout Description
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43570 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43573 \begin_layout Description
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_layout Description
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43594 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43597 \begin_layout Description
43599 \begin_inset space ~
43603 \begin_inset space ~
43609 \begin_layout Description
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43618 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43624 \begin_inset Index idx
43627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 , when using this, set the document language to
43639 \begin_layout Description
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43648 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43653 , when using this, set the document language to
43656 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_layout Description
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43671 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43677 \begin_inset Index idx
43680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43682 packages ! japanese
43687 , when using this, set the document language to
43692 \begin_layout Description
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43701 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43706 , when using this, set the document language to
43711 \begin_layout Description
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43720 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43725 , when using this, set the document language to
43730 \begin_layout Description
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43735 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43738 \begin_layout Description
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43744 \begin_inset space ~
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43751 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43754 \begin_layout Description
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43768 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43769 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43772 \begin_layout Description
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43784 \begin_layout Description
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43793 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43794 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43797 \begin_layout Description
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43812 \begin_inset Index idx
43815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43822 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43825 \begin_layout Description
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43838 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43848 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43855 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43856 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43858 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43861 \begin_layout Description
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43870 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43876 \begin_inset Index idx
43879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43886 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43889 \begin_layout Description
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43894 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43900 \begin_inset Index idx
43903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43905 packages ! inputenc
43911 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43915 \begin_layout Description
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43928 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43935 \begin_layout Description
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43948 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43949 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43950 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43954 \begin_layout Description
43956 \begin_inset space ~
43960 \begin_inset space ~
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43967 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43968 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43971 \begin_layout Section
43973 \begin_inset Index idx
43976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 \begin_inset Index idx
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43993 \begin_inset Index idx
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 Color ! Shaded boxes
44003 \begin_inset Index idx
44006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44007 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44015 \begin_layout Standard
44016 Here you can alter the font color for the
44020 (default: black), for
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44028 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44032 (default: white) and for
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44045 sets the color back to the default.
44048 \begin_layout Standard
44049 Clicking any button showing
44057 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44058 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44059 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44060 later more quickly.
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44064 Note, if you change the
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44072 font color and use the option
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44080 in the document settings under
44083 \begin_inset space ~
44088 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44095 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44103 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44109 \begin_layout Standard
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44122 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44128 Code after a forced page break:
44131 \begin_layout Itemize
44132 For the page color:
44133 \begin_inset Newline newline
44140 pagecolor{color name}
44143 \begin_layout Itemize
44144 For the text color:
44145 \begin_inset Newline newline
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44156 You are restricted to one of
44192 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44205 \begin_inset Newline newline
44208 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44209 names to refer to them:
44212 \begin_layout Itemize
44218 \begin_inset Newline newline
44223 page_backgroundcolor
44226 \begin_layout Itemize
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44236 \begin_inset Newline newline
44244 \begin_layout Itemize
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44254 \begin_inset Newline newline
44262 \begin_layout Itemize
44266 \begin_inset space ~
44272 \begin_inset Newline newline
44280 \begin_layout Standard
44281 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_layout Section
44304 \begin_layout Standard
44305 Here you can adjust the
44309 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44313 as described in section
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44320 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44327 \begin_layout Section
44331 \begin_layout Standard
44332 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44338 \begin_inset Index idx
44341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44343 packages ! biblatex
44353 \begin_inset Index idx
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44368 \begin_inset Index idx
44371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44379 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44382 Sectioned bibliography
44384 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44390 \begin_inset Index idx
44393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44395 packages ! bibtopic
44405 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44406 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44410 for the generation of the bibliography.
44411 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44418 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44425 \begin_layout Section
44429 \begin_layout Standard
44430 Here you can define the
44434 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44442 reference "sec:Index"
44449 \begin_layout Section
44453 \begin_layout Standard
44454 The PDF properties are explained in section
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44461 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44468 \begin_layout Section
44472 \begin_layout Standard
44473 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44474 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44480 \begin_inset Index idx
44483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 \begin_inset Index idx
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44510 \begin_inset Index idx
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 \begin_inset Index idx
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44540 \begin_inset Index idx
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44545 packages ! mathdots
44555 \begin_inset Index idx
44558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 packages ! mathtools
44570 \begin_inset Index idx
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44585 \begin_inset Index idx
44588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44590 packages ! stackrel
44600 \begin_inset Index idx
44603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44605 packages ! stmaryrd
44615 \begin_inset Index idx
44618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44620 packages ! undertilde
44625 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44628 \begin_layout Description
44629 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44630 -errors in formulas,
44631 ensure that you have this enabled.
44634 \begin_layout Description
44635 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44636 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44637 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44641 \begin_layout Description
44642 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44657 \begin_layout Description
44658 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44673 \begin_layout Description
44674 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44685 \begin_layout Description
44686 mathtools is used for the math commands
44722 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44729 \begin_layout Description
44730 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44732 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44741 \begin_layout Description
44742 stackrel is used for the math command
44759 \begin_layout Description
44760 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44763 \begin_layout Description
44764 undertilde is used for the math command
44772 Accents for one Character
44781 \begin_layout Section
44785 \begin_layout Standard
44786 The float placement options are described in the section
44789 \begin_inset space ~
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44805 \begin_layout Section
44809 \begin_layout Standard
44810 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44812 Program Code Listings
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_layout Section
44829 \begin_layout Standard
44830 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44838 set to be used and set the
44843 The itemize environment is described in section
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44850 reference "sec:Itemize"
44857 \begin_layout Standard
44858 You can furthermore specify a
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44866 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44867 command of the desired character.
44868 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44875 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44881 \begin_inset space \space{}
44885 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44895 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44896 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44909 -packages in the preamble (menu
44912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44913 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44916 \begin_inset space ~
44922 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44926 usepackage{textcomp}
44929 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44933 usepackage{amssymb}
44943 \begin_layout Section
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44948 Branches are described in section
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44955 reference "sec:Branches"
44962 \begin_layout Section
44964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44966 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44973 \begin_layout Standard
44974 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44986 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45006 View Master Document
45007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45014 Update Master Document
45015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45022 menu or the toolbar.
45023 The default is set in
45025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45026 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45031 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45041 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45048 \begin_layout Description
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45057 Output settings for the menu
45059 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45067 For a detailed description see section
45069 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_layout Description
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45091 Options offers settings for the export format
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45104 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45117 settings are described in detail in section
45119 Math Output in XHTML
45124 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45142 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45145 \begin_layout Description
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45152 Save transient properties
45154 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45155 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45156 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45160 \begin_layout Itemize
45161 the activation of change tracking
45164 \begin_layout Itemize
45165 the output of tracked changes
45168 \begin_layout Itemize
45169 the recording of the document directory path.
45172 \begin_layout Standard
45173 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45174 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45178 \begin_layout Section
45186 \begin_layout Standard
45187 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45189 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45191 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45193 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45198 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45199 -syntax is given in section
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45206 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45213 \begin_layout Chapter
45219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45221 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45226 \begin_inset Index idx
45229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 \begin_layout Standard
45239 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45241 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45245 It has the following submenus.
45248 \begin_layout Section
45252 \begin_layout Subsection
45256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45257 User Interface File
45258 \begin_inset Index idx
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 Customization ! of toolbars
45268 \begin_inset Index idx
45271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45272 Customization ! of menus
45280 \begin_layout Standard
45281 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45282 interface (ui) file.
45283 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45291 \begin_layout Description
45296 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45299 \begin_layout Description
45306 the menu entries in popup context menus
45309 \begin_layout Description
45314 specifies the toolbar buttons
45317 \begin_layout Standard
45318 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45319 and edit the entries.
45322 \begin_layout Standard
45323 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45335 entries must be finished with an explicit
45360 and in the case of the
45361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45373 The syntax for the entries is:
45376 \begin_layout Standard
45377 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45406 \begin_layout Standard
45408 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45411 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45412 -functions are listed in the menu
45414 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45424 \begin_layout Standard
45425 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45431 \begin_layout Standard
45432 For example, assuming you use the menu
45434 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45437 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45441 \begin_layout Standard
45442 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45466 \begin_layout Standard
45468 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45483 to have the sixth bookmark.
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45495 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45496 's toolbar buttons.
45497 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45501 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45516 Enable tool tips in main work area
45518 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45526 \begin_layout Standard
45531 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45532 should display in the menu
45534 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_layout Subsection
45548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45552 \begin_layout Standard
45555 Restore window layouts and geometries
45558 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45559 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45563 \begin_layout Standard
45566 Restore cursor positions
45568 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45572 \begin_layout Standard
45575 Load opened files from last session
45577 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45584 Clear all session information
45586 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45587 sessions (cursor positions, names
45588 of last opened documents, etc.).
45591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45595 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45600 \begin_inset Index idx
45603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45612 \begin_layout Standard
45615 Backup original documents when saving
45617 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45618 it was saved the last time.
45619 It is stored in the
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45628 \begin_inset space ~
45632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45634 reference "sec:Paths"
45638 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45641 \begin_inset space ~
45647 The backup file has the file extension
45648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45662 \begin_layout Standard
45665 Backup documents, every
45667 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45670 \begin_layout Standard
45673 Save documents compressed by default
45675 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45676 \begin_inset space ~
45680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45682 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45687 This applies to newly created documents only.
45688 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45692 Windows & work area
45695 \begin_layout Standard
45698 Open documents in tabs
45700 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45704 \begin_layout Standard
45709 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45716 \begin_inset space ~
45720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45722 reference "sec:Paths"
45726 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45733 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45734 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45735 of \SpecialChar LyX
45737 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45738 instance is created for each file.
45741 \begin_layout Standard
45744 Single close-tab button
45746 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45756 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45757 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45758 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45762 \begin_layout Standard
45763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45772 before the change takes effect.
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45785 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45787 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45789 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45793 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45794 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45795 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45798 \begin_layout Subsection
45800 \begin_inset Index idx
45803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45812 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45819 \begin_layout Standard
45820 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45825 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 This section only deals with the fonts
45837 the \SpecialChar LyX
45839 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45854 \begin_layout Standard
45855 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45872 (depends on the system) as its
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45891 \begin_layout Standard
45892 You can change the font size with the
45899 \begin_layout Standard
45904 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45909 points have the size of 1
45910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45920 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45925 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45930 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45931 \begin_inset space ~
45935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45937 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45944 \begin_layout Standard
45947 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45949 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45950 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45951 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45952 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45953 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45955 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45962 \begin_layout Subsection
45964 \begin_inset Index idx
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45975 \begin_inset Index idx
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 \begin_layout Standard
45988 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45989 by choosing an item in the
45990 list and selecting the
45997 \begin_layout Standard
45998 By checking the option
46002 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46005 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46006 \begin_inset space ~
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46015 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46018 \begin_layout Subsection
46020 \begin_inset Index idx
46023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 \begin_layout Standard
46033 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46042 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46043 This feature is described in section
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46050 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46057 \begin_layout Standard
46058 Checking the option
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46069 \begin_inset space ~
46074 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46077 \begin_layout Section
46079 \begin_inset Index idx
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46091 \begin_layout Subsection
46095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46099 \begin_layout Standard
46102 Cursor follows scrollbar
46104 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46108 \begin_layout Standard
46109 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46110 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46111 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46117 Scroll below end of document
46119 is self-explanatory.
46122 \begin_layout Standard
46123 In \SpecialChar LyX
46124 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46131 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46133 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46134 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46137 \begin_layout Standard
46140 Sort environments alphabetically
46142 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46145 \begin_layout Standard
46148 Group environments by their category
46150 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46153 \begin_layout Standard
46158 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46174 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46179 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46180 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46184 \begin_layout Subsection
46186 \begin_inset Index idx
46189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 \begin_inset Index idx
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46200 Settings ! Shortcuts
46208 \begin_layout Standard
46213 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46215 Several binding files are available, among them:
46218 \begin_layout Description
46219 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46222 \begin_layout Description
46223 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46235 \begin_layout Description
46236 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46247 \begin_layout Standard
46248 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46253 , and binding files for special languages.
46254 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46259 \begin_inset space \space{}
46263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46271 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46272 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46273 will try to use the appropriate binding
46277 \begin_layout Standard
46278 Some binding files, like
46282 , only have a limited scope.
46283 When looking at the end of the file
46287 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46290 \begin_layout Standard
46294 \begin_inset space ~
46298 \begin_inset space ~
46303 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46304 in the selected key binding file.
46307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46311 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46316 \begin_inset Index idx
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46320 Key Bindings ! Editing
46328 \begin_layout Standard
46329 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46330 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46331 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46332 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46335 Show key-bindings containing
46338 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46339 Insert there for example as keyword
46340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46347 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46348 functions that contain
46349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46357 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46358 All \SpecialChar LyX
46359 functions are also listed in the file
46364 that you will find in the
46371 \begin_layout Standard
46372 For example, to add the shortcut
46380 , select the function and press the
46385 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46386 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46390 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46391 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46393 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46394 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46396 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46401 \begin_layout Standard
46402 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46408 The syntax of the entries is:
46411 \begin_layout Standard
46417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46436 \begin_layout Standard
46437 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46438 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46466 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46467 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46468 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46469 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46471 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46475 , you needed to specify it as
46480 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46483 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46486 \begin_layout Subsection
46488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46490 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46495 \begin_inset Index idx
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46505 \begin_inset Index idx
46508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46517 \begin_layout Standard
46518 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46519 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46520 provides keyboard maps.
46521 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46522 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46534 and select the keyboard map file named
46541 \begin_layout Standard
46550 keyboard map and, if you use the
46554 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46557 arg "keymap-primary"
46563 arg "keymap-secondary"
46566 respectively or toggle between them with
46569 arg "keymap-toggle"
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46593 \begin_layout Standard
46594 You can also specify the mouse
46596 Wheel scrolling speed
46599 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46603 Middle mouse button pasting
46605 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46606 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46609 \begin_layout Standard
46617 \begin_inset space ~
46621 \begin_inset space ~
46626 you can select a key for zooming.
46627 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46630 \begin_layout Subsection
46634 \begin_layout Standard
46635 Input completion is described in section
46636 \begin_inset space ~
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46642 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46649 \begin_layout Section
46651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46658 \begin_inset Index idx
46661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46668 \begin_inset Index idx
46671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46680 \begin_layout Standard
46681 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46682 are normally determined during
46684 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46687 \begin_layout Description
46689 \begin_inset space ~
46692 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46693 's working directory.
46694 It is the default when you
46705 \begin_inset space ~
46713 \begin_layout Description
46715 \begin_inset space ~
46718 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46722 \begin_inset space ~
46726 \begin_inset space ~
46734 \begin_layout Description
46736 \begin_inset space ~
46739 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46749 \begin_inset Newline newline
46753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46765 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46766 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46774 \begin_layout Description
46776 \begin_inset space ~
46780 \begin_inset Index idx
46783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46789 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46790 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46791 \begin_inset space ~
46795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46797 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46805 will be used to save the backups.
46806 \begin_inset Newline newline
46809 Backup files have the ending
46810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46820 \begin_layout Description
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46825 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46826 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46835 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46841 You can edit this file with the program
46850 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46851 in its preferences under
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46860 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46865 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46867 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46868 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46874 and \SpecialChar LyX
46875 need to be running the same time.
46876 \begin_inset Newline newline
46879 The pipe is also used for the
46883 feature, see section
46884 \begin_inset space ~
46888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46890 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46895 \begin_inset Newline newline
46898 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46899 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46900 \begin_inset Newline newline
46916 \begin_layout Description
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46921 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46924 \begin_layout Description
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46929 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46930 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46931 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46934 \begin_layout Description
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46939 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46945 You only need to specify it if you are using
46949 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46951 For \SpecialChar LyX
46956 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46960 \begin_layout Description
46962 \begin_inset space ~
46965 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46966 When \SpecialChar LyX
46967 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46968 to find it on the system.
46969 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46971 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46980 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46981 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46984 \begin_layout Description
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46989 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46990 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46991 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46992 code or in the document
46994 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46996 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46997 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46998 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46999 scanned for the input files.
47000 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47001 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47003 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47004 compilation may fail for some documents.
47007 \begin_layout Section
47011 \begin_layout Standard
47012 Here you can insert your
47021 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47029 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47033 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47036 \begin_layout Section
47038 \begin_inset Index idx
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47042 Language ! Settings
47048 \begin_inset Index idx
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47052 Settings ! Language
47060 \begin_layout Subsection
47062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47064 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47071 \begin_layout Description
47073 \begin_inset space ~
47077 \begin_inset space ~
47080 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47082 You can find its actual translation status here:
47083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47085 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47093 \begin_layout Description
47095 \begin_inset space ~
47098 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47099 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47100 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47101 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47118 The most widespread language package is
47123 \begin_inset Index idx
47126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47135 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47136 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47137 come with the alternative
47143 \begin_inset Index idx
47146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 packages ! polyglossia
47153 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47154 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47160 The available selections are described in section
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47167 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47174 \begin_layout Description
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47179 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47180 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47181 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47182 An example is the start command
47188 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47190 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47210 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47215 \begin_layout Description
47217 \begin_inset space ~
47225 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47226 command toggles the package on and off.
47229 \begin_layout Description
47231 \begin_inset space ~
47235 \begin_inset space ~
47238 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47242 \begin_layout Description
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47248 \begin_inset space ~
47251 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47255 \begin_layout Description
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47264 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47265 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47266 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47268 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47275 \begin_layout Description
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47280 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47282 When this option is not set, the
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47290 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47292 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47295 \begin_inset space ~
47303 \begin_layout Description
47305 \begin_inset space ~
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47317 When it is not set, the
47320 \begin_inset space ~
47325 is set to the end of the document.
47328 \begin_layout Description
47330 \begin_inset space ~
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47337 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47338 language will be underlined in blue.
47341 \begin_layout Description
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47347 \begin_inset space ~
47350 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47351 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47359 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47360 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47361 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47362 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47365 \begin_layout Subsection
47369 \begin_layout Standard
47370 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47377 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47384 \begin_layout Section
47388 \begin_layout Subsection
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47392 name "subsec:General-output"
47399 \begin_layout Description
47401 \begin_inset space ~
47404 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47406 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47414 For a detailed description see section
47416 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47421 \begin_inset space ~
47429 \begin_layout Description
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47434 Options Options for the program
47438 that is used for the export format
47443 \begin_inset space ~
47447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47449 reference "subsec:Export"
47454 Possible options are listed in the
47459 \begin_inset Newline newline
47463 \begin_inset Flex URL
47466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47468 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47478 \begin_layout Description
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47490 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47491 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47499 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47502 \begin_layout Description
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47508 \begin_inset Index idx
47511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47518 \begin_inset Index idx
47521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47522 Settings ! Date format
47527 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47528 \begin_inset Newline newline
47532 \begin_inset Flex URL
47535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47537 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47543 \begin_inset Newline newline
47546 For example the format
47547 \begin_inset Newline newline
47551 \begin_inset Newline newline
47554 prints the date as day/month/year.
47557 \begin_layout Description
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47566 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47567 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47570 \begin_layout Subsection
47576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47578 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47583 \begin_inset Index idx
47586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47587 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47596 \begin_layout Description
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47606 \begin_inset space ~
47610 \begin_inset space ~
47613 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47618 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47639 are used for Cyrillic.
47640 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47653 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47655 sets up in the background.
47656 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47659 \begin_layout Description
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47676 options They only have an effect when the program
47680 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47683 \begin_layout Standard
47684 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47685 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47686 manuals of the applications.
47689 \begin_layout Description
47691 \begin_inset space ~
47694 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47701 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47708 \begin_layout Description
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47713 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47714 \begin_inset space ~
47718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47720 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47727 \begin_layout Description
47729 \begin_inset space ~
47732 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47739 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47746 \begin_layout Description
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47755 command Command for the program
47757 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47760 that is described in the section
47762 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47767 Additional Features
47772 \begin_layout Standard
47773 There are additionally the following options:
47776 \begin_layout Description
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47782 \begin_inset space ~
47786 \begin_inset space ~
47790 \begin_inset space ~
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47798 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47816 to separate folders.
47817 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47819 \begin_inset Index idx
47822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47829 \begin_inset Index idx
47832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47841 \begin_layout Description
47843 \begin_inset space ~
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47855 \begin_inset space ~
47859 \begin_inset space ~
47863 \begin_inset space ~
47866 changes Removes all manually set
47872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47873 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47880 dialog when changing the document class.
47883 \begin_layout Section
47885 \begin_inset space ~
47889 \begin_inset Index idx
47892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47901 \begin_layout Subsection
47903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47905 name "subsec:Converters"
47910 \begin_inset Index idx
47913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47922 \begin_layout Standard
47923 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47924 from one format to another.
47925 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47926 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47933 \begin_inset space ~
47938 field and press the
47943 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47952 drop-down list, modify the
47956 field and press the
47963 \begin_layout Standard
47966 Converter File Cache
47972 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47974 Maximum Age (in days
47977 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47978 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47981 \begin_layout Standard
47982 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47983 definition, is described in the section
47994 \begin_layout Subsection
47996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47998 name "sec:File-Formats"
48003 \begin_inset Index idx
48006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48013 \begin_inset Index idx
48016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48025 \begin_layout Standard
48026 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48036 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48039 \begin_layout Standard
48040 You can also define the
48042 Default output format
48044 that is used when you use
48046 View, Update, View Master Document
48050 Update Master Document
48056 menu or the toolbar.
48059 \begin_layout Standard
48060 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48071 \begin_layout Standard
48072 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48074 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48075 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48076 This is done by specifying a
48081 More about this is described in the section
48092 \begin_layout Chapter
48093 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48095 \begin_inset Index idx
48098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48107 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48114 \begin_layout Standard
48116 \begin_inset space ~
48120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48122 reference "tab:Units"
48126 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48127 and used in this documentation.
48130 \begin_layout Standard
48131 \begin_inset Float table
48137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48138 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48156 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48164 \begin_inset Tabular
48165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48375 scaled point (65536
48376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48454 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48527 % of original image width
48532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48843 \begin_layout Chapter
48845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48847 name "chap:Credits"
48854 \begin_layout Standard
48855 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48856 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48859 \begin_layout Itemize
48862 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48865 \begin_layout Itemize
48871 \begin_layout Itemize
48877 \begin_layout Itemize
48883 \begin_layout Itemize
48889 \begin_layout Itemize
48895 \begin_layout Itemize
48901 \begin_layout Itemize
48907 \begin_layout Itemize
48910 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48913 \begin_layout Itemize
48919 \begin_layout Itemize
48925 \begin_layout Itemize
48931 \begin_layout Itemize
48937 \begin_layout Itemize
48943 \begin_layout Itemize
48949 \begin_layout Itemize
48955 \begin_layout Itemize
48961 \begin_layout Itemize
48962 The \SpecialChar LyX
48964 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48974 \begin_layout Standard
48975 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48978 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48985 \begin_layout Bibliography
48986 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48987 LatexCommand bibitem
48994 The \SpecialChar LyX
48996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48999 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49005 \begin_inset Newline newline
49009 \begin_inset Flex URL
49012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49014 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49022 \begin_layout Bibliography
49023 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49024 LatexCommand bibitem
49025 key "latexcompanion"
49030 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49032 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49033 Companion Second Edition.
49036 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49039 \begin_layout Bibliography
49040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49041 LatexCommand bibitem
49047 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49050 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49054 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49057 \begin_layout Bibliography
49058 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49059 LatexCommand bibitem
49068 : A Document Preparation System.
49071 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49074 \begin_layout Bibliography
49075 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49076 LatexCommand bibitem
49086 The \SpecialChar TeX
49090 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49093 \begin_layout Bibliography
49094 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49095 LatexCommand bibitem
49101 The \SpecialChar TeX
49103 \begin_inset Newline newline
49107 \begin_inset Flex URL
49110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49112 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49120 \begin_layout Bibliography
49121 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49122 LatexCommand bibitem
49128 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49130 \begin_inset Newline newline
49134 \begin_inset Flex URL
49137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49139 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49147 \begin_layout Bibliography
49148 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49149 LatexCommand bibitem
49156 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49158 name "Documentation"
49159 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49166 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49170 \begin_inset Newline newline
49174 \begin_inset Flex URL
49177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49179 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49187 \begin_layout Bibliography
49188 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49189 LatexCommand bibitem
49196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49198 name "Documentation"
49199 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49204 how to use the program
49206 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49210 \begin_inset Newline newline
49214 \begin_inset Flex URL
49217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49219 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49227 \begin_layout Bibliography
49228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49229 LatexCommand bibitem
49236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49238 name "Documentation"
49239 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49244 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49250 \begin_inset Index idx
49253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49255 packages ! biblatex
49261 \begin_inset Newline newline
49265 \begin_inset Flex URL
49268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49270 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49278 \begin_layout Bibliography
49279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49280 LatexCommand bibitem
49287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49289 name "Documentation"
49290 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49295 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49301 \begin_inset Index idx
49304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49312 \begin_inset Newline newline
49316 \begin_inset Flex URL
49319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49321 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49329 \begin_layout Bibliography
49330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49331 LatexCommand bibitem
49338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49340 name "Documentation"
49341 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49351 \begin_inset Newline newline
49355 \begin_inset Flex URL
49358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49360 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49368 \begin_layout Bibliography
49369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49370 LatexCommand bibitem
49371 key "makeindex-man"
49377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49380 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49390 \begin_inset Newline newline
49394 \begin_inset Flex URL
49397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49399 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49407 \begin_layout Bibliography
49408 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49409 LatexCommand bibitem
49416 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49418 name "Documentation"
49419 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49429 \begin_inset Newline newline
49433 \begin_inset Flex URL
49436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49438 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49446 \begin_layout Bibliography
49447 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49448 LatexCommand bibitem
49455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49457 name "Documentation"
49458 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49463 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49465 \begin_inset Newline newline
49469 \begin_inset Flex URL
49472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49474 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49482 \begin_layout Bibliography
49483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49484 LatexCommand bibitem
49491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49493 name "Documentation"
49494 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49499 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49505 \begin_inset Index idx
49508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49516 \begin_inset Newline newline
49520 \begin_inset Flex URL
49523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49525 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49533 \begin_layout Bibliography
49534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49535 LatexCommand bibitem
49542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49544 name "Documentation"
49545 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49550 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49556 \begin_inset Index idx
49559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49561 packages ! enumitem
49567 \begin_inset Newline newline
49571 \begin_inset Flex URL
49574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49576 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49584 \begin_layout Bibliography
49585 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49586 LatexCommand bibitem
49593 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49595 name "Documentation"
49596 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49601 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49607 \begin_inset Index idx
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49612 packages ! fancyhdr
49618 \begin_inset Newline newline
49622 \begin_inset Flex URL
49625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49635 \begin_layout Bibliography
49636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49637 LatexCommand bibitem
49644 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49646 name "Documentation"
49647 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49652 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49658 \begin_inset Index idx
49661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 packages ! hyperref
49669 \begin_inset Newline newline
49673 \begin_inset Flex URL
49676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49678 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49686 \begin_layout Bibliography
49687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49688 LatexCommand bibitem
49695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49697 name "Documentation"
49698 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49703 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49709 \begin_inset Index idx
49712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49720 \begin_inset Newline newline
49724 \begin_inset Flex URL
49727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49729 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49737 \begin_layout Bibliography
49738 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49739 LatexCommand bibitem
49746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49748 name "Documentation"
49749 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49754 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49760 \begin_inset Index idx
49763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49765 packages ! prettyref
49771 \begin_inset Newline newline
49775 \begin_inset Flex URL
49778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49780 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49788 \begin_layout Bibliography
49789 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49790 LatexCommand bibitem
49797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49799 name "Documentation"
49800 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49805 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49811 \begin_inset Index idx
49814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49816 packages ! refstyle
49822 \begin_inset Newline newline
49826 \begin_inset Flex URL
49829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49831 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49839 \begin_layout Bibliography
49840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49841 LatexCommand bibitem
49848 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49851 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49856 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49858 \begin_inset Newline newline
49862 \begin_inset Flex URL
49865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49867 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49875 \begin_layout Bibliography
49876 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49877 LatexCommand bibitem
49884 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49887 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49892 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49894 \begin_inset Newline newline
49898 \begin_inset Flex URL
49901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49903 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49911 \begin_layout Bibliography
49912 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49913 LatexCommand bibitem
49920 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49923 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49928 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49929 for Cyrillic languages:
49930 \begin_inset Newline newline
49934 \begin_inset Flex URL
49937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49939 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49947 \begin_layout Bibliography
49948 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49949 LatexCommand bibitem
49956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49959 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49964 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49966 \begin_inset Newline newline
49970 \begin_inset Flex URL
49973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49975 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49983 \begin_layout Bibliography
49984 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49985 LatexCommand bibitem
49992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49995 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50000 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50002 \begin_inset Newline newline
50006 \begin_inset Flex URL
50009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50011 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50019 \begin_layout Bibliography
50020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50021 LatexCommand bibitem
50028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50031 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50036 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50038 \begin_inset Newline newline
50042 \begin_inset Flex URL
50045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50047 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50055 \begin_layout Bibliography
50056 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50057 LatexCommand bibitem
50064 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50067 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50072 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50074 \begin_inset Newline newline
50078 \begin_inset Flex URL
50081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50083 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50091 \begin_layout Bibliography
50092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50093 LatexCommand bibitem
50100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50103 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50108 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50110 \begin_inset Newline newline
50114 \begin_inset Flex URL
50117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50119 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50127 \begin_layout Bibliography
50128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50129 LatexCommand bibitem
50136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50139 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50144 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50146 \begin_inset Newline newline
50150 \begin_inset Flex URL
50153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50155 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50163 \begin_layout Bibliography
50164 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50165 LatexCommand bibitem
50172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50175 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50180 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50182 \begin_inset Newline newline
50186 \begin_inset Flex URL
50189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50191 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50199 \begin_layout Bibliography
50200 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50201 LatexCommand bibitem
50208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50211 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50216 about new features in
50222 \begin_inset Newline newline
50226 \begin_inset Flex URL
50229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50231 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50239 \begin_layout Standard
50240 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50274 \begin_inset Note Note
50277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50284 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50285 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50286 bibliography is the second one:
50294 \begin_layout Standard
50295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50296 LatexCommand bibtex
50297 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50298 options "biblio/alphadin"
50305 \begin_layout Standard
50306 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50310 \begin_layout Standard
50311 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50312 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50318 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50319 LatexCommand printindex